This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety,
as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in
the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:
!Danger
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper
precautions are not taken.
!Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.
!Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not
taken.
Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Note
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product,
or to a particular part of the documentation.
The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual.
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment.
Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and
to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and
standards.
Note the following:
!Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog
or the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other
manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and
installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
MOBY, SIMATIC and SINEC are trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Some of the other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the
owner’s rights may be violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes.
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the
hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be pre-
cluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the
data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary cor-
rections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improve-
ment are welcomed.
Siemens AG 2001, 2002, 2004
Technical data subject to change.
Disclaimer of LiabilityCopyright Siemens AG 2001 All rights reserved
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are
reserved.
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Special Products, Projects Automotive Industry, Training
P.O. Box 4848, D-90327 Nürnberg
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order No. 6GT2 597-4BA00-0EA2
Safety Guidelines
Qualified Personnel
Correct Usage
Trademarks
i
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Contents
1 General 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Introduction – MOBY U 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Configuration and Installation Guidelines 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 The Fundamentals 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 Transmission Window 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 MOBY Operating Modes 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3 Communication Area of the MDS 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.4 Dwell Time of the MDS in Zone 1 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.5 Communication Times 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.6 Battery Life 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.7 Changing the battery on the MDS U315/MDS U525 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Declaration of conformity 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Installation Guidelines 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Transmission window as a function of the assignment of the SLG
and MDS 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2 The effect of metal on the transmission window 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3 The effect of non-metallic materials/objects on the transmission window 3-49
3.3.4 Interference and users in the 2.45 GHz range 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.5 Chemical resistance of the mobile data storage units 3-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 EMC Guidelines 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Preface 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 General 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Spreading of Interference 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4 Cabinet Layout 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5 Avoiding Sources of Interference 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.6 Equipotential Bonding 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.7 Shielding the Cables 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.8 Basic EMC Rules 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 MOBY Shielding Concept 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 SLG Cable between ASM 475 and SLG U92 with RS 422 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 SLG Cable and Plug Connector Allocations (RS 422) 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1 Cable Configuration 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2 Plug Connector Allocations 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.3 Connection cable 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 SLG cable and connector pin assignments (RS 232) for serial
connection to PC 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1 Cable configuration 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.2 Plug Allocations 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.3 Connection Cables with Lengths 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 SLG cable and connector pin assignments (RS 232) for ASM 480 3-79. . . . .
ii MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.9 3964R Procedure 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10 Service Cable and Connector Assignments (Service Interface) 3-88. . . . . . . .
3.10.1 Cable configuration 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.2 Connector Assignment at the Service Interface 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.3 Connecting Cable for the RS 232 Service Interface 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.4 Connecting Cable for Synchronization 3-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.5 Connecting Cable for Control via BERO Contacts 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11 Update/Service/Diagnostic Functions
(Service Interface) 3-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.1 Update Functions 3-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.2 Save firmware version 3-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.3 Service/Diagnostic Functions 3-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12 SLG LEDs 3-127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13 SLG synchronization via cable connection 3-128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14 Power reduction 3-134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Mobile Data Memories 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Introduction 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 MDS U313 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 MDS U315 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 MDS U524 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 MDS U525 4-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6 MDS U589 4-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Read/Write Devices 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 SLG U92 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Interfaces 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Introduction 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 ASM 452 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 ASM 473 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 ASM 475 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 ASM 480 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 Accessories 7-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Software MOBY U 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 MOBY Wide-Range Power Pack 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 MOBY STG U Hand-Held Terminal 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
iii
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
A Documentation A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B Error Messages B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1 Error messages and causes in MOBY U with ASM and FC 45
(direct MDS addressing) B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.1 General Errors B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.2 Error Messages B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2 Error messages and Causes when MOBY U Is Used with
ASM 452 and FC 46 (Filehandler) B-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.1 PROFIBUS diagnosis B-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.2 Evaluation of the ERR LED B-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.3 Filehandler Error Messages B-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.3 Error messages and causes in MOBY U with
ASM and FC 56 (filehandler) B-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.3.1 General Errors B-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.3.2 Error classes B-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.3.3 Filehandler error messages B-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.3.4 Error indication with the ERR-LED B-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C ASCII Table C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
iv MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Figures
2-1 Overview of the MOBY U components 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1 Status zones for the MDS in the transmission field of the SLG U92 3-3. . . . .
3-2 Antenna field with zones 1 and 2 and the radiuses of the range limit
in steps of 0.5 m.
The range limit determines the sizes of zones 1 and 2. 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Example of case a) when the range limit dili = 2.0 m 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Entry into zone 1 (before dilion_max is reached) 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Entry into zone 1 (within the tolerance range of the range limit dilitol) 3-14. . . .
3-6 Entry into zone 1 (after the MDS crosses the range limit dilion_min) 3-14. . . . .
3-7 Example of case b) when the range limit dili = 2.0 m 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8 Exit from zone 1 (after the range limit is crossed) 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9 Exit from zone 1 (in the tolerance range of the range limit) 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10 Exit from zone 1 (before the range limit is reached) 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11 Exit from zone 1 (outside the range limit) 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12 Underside of the MDS with the battery compartment cover screwed on 3-35.
3-13 Open MDS with battery pulled out 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14 Open MDS with battery soldered in and reset circuit 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-15 Underside of the MDS with the battery compartment cover in place 3-37. . . .
3-16 MDS arranged parallel to SLG; Direction of movement parallel to that 3-41. .
3-17 MDS arranged parallel to SLG; Direction of movement perpendicular
to that 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18 Arrangement of SLG at an angle of 45 ° to MDS; direction of
movement in direction of beam from MDS antenna 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19 Arrangement of SLG at an angle of 45 ° to MDS; direction of
movement perpendicular to direction of beam from MDS antenna 3-43. . . . . .
3-20 MDS arranged perpendicular to SLG; direction of movement in
direction of beam from MDS antenna 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21 MDS arranged perpendicular to SLG; direction of movement
perpendicular to direction of beam from MDS antenna 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22 Transmission window: SLG and MDS parallel to each other 3-45. . . . . . . . . . .
3-23 Transmission window: SLG at an angle of 45 ° to MDS 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24 Transmission window: SLG and MDS perpendicular to each other 3-47. . . . .
3-25 Spreading of Interference 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26 Possible interference coupling 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-27 Shielding by the housing 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-28 Avoidance of interference with optimal layout 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-29 Filtering the voltage 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-30 Suppression of inductivity 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-31 Equipotential bonding 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-32 Shielding the cables 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-33 Connecting the shield bar 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-34 Interruption of shielded cables 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-35 Layout of the ASM 475 with shield connecting element 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-36 SLG with extra power pack 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-37 Drawing of how to mount the SLG plug connector 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-38 Connection cable ASM 452/473 ↔ SLG U92 with RS 422 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . .
3-39 Connection cable ASM 475 ↔ SLG U92 with RS 422 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-40 Connection cable ASM 480 ↔ SLG U92 with RS 422 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-41 Wide-range power pack for SLG U92 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-42 Connection cable for PC ↔ SLG U92 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-43 Connection cable ASM 480 ↔ SLG U92 with RS 232 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
v
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3-44 3964R receive routine with block check in the SLG U92 (slave) 3-85. . . . . . . .
3-45 3964R send routine with block check in the SLG U92 (slave) 3-86. . . . . . . . . .
3-46 3964R send routine with block check in the SLG U92 (slave) 3-87. . . . . . . . . .
3-47 Connector assignment of the SLG U92 service connector 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-48 Connecting cable PC ↔ RS 232 service interface 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-49 Drawing of how to assemble the service connector 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-50 Connector assignment of the SLG U92 service connector 3-92. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-51 Connector assignment of the SLG U92 service connector 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-52 Three SLGs connected for synchronization 3-129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-53 Synchronization between two SLGs 3-130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1 Status zones for MDS in transmission field of SLG U92 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 MDS U313 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 Metal-free space, MDS U313 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 Dimensions of the MDS U313 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 MDS U315 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6 Metal-free space, MDS U315 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7 Dimensions of the MDS U315 4-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8 MDS U524 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9 Metal-free space, MDS U524 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10 Dimensions of MDS U524 4-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11 MDS U525 4-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12 Metal-free space, MDS U525 4-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13 Dimensions of MDS U525 4-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14 MDS U589 4-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15 Metal-free space, MDS U589 4-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16 Dimensions of the MDS U589 4-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-17 Universal holder with heat-resistant data carrier MDS U589 4-32. . . . . . . . . . .
4-18 Dimensions: universal holder for heat-resistant data carrier MDS U589 4-33.
4-19 Dimensions: MDS U589 data memory holder 4-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20 Assembling the MDS U589 and holder 4-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1 Read/write device SLG U92 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Transmission window of the SLG U92 (without FCC) 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Transmission window of the SLG U92 (with FCC) 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Metal-free space of SLG U92 5-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5 Distance D: two or more adjacent SLG U92s and only one
MDS U in each detection field 5-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 Distance D: two SLG U92s mounted either adjacent or adjacent
but turned toward each other 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7 Distance D: two SLG U92s back to back 5-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8 Distance D: two SLG U92s opposite each other 5-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9 Dimensional drawing of the SLG U92 5-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1 Interface ASM 452 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Configurator – ASM 452 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Connector for the ASM 452, 473 ↔ SLG U92 with RS 422
(6GT2 090-0BC00) 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Connecting cable for the ASM 452, 473 ↔ SLG U92 with RS 422
(6GT2 091-1CH20) 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 Dimensional drawing of the ASM 452 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6 Interfaces and displays of the ASM 452 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 Length of bared cable for PROFIBUS cable 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8 Setting PROFIBUS address/turning on terminating resistance 6-10. . . . . . . . .
6-9 Interface ASM 473 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10 Configurator for an ASM 473 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
vi MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
6-11 Maximum configuration of ASM 473s on one ET 200X 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12 Interfaces and LEDs of the ASM 473 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13 Dimensions for mounting holes for basic and expansion modules 6-17. . . . . .
6-14 Interface ASM 475 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15 Configuration for the ASM 475 (central) 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16 Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 475 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17 Wiring of the ASM 475 to the SLG U92 with RS 422 (6GT2 091-0E...) 6-24. .
6-18 Baring of the cable shield for customer-fabricated cable 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19 Interface ASM 480 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20 Configuration for an ASM 480 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21 Dimensional drawing of the ASM 480 6-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22 DIP switches on the ASM 480 6-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23 Wiring of the ASM 480 to the SLG U92 with RS 232 (6GT2 091-0E...) 6-32. .
6-24 Wiring of the ASM 480 to the SLG U92 with RS 422 (6GT2 091-0E...) 6-33. .
7-1 “Software MOBY” V3.6 basic menu 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 MOBY Wide-Range Power Pack 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Connector allocation of 24 V output 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Dimensions of MOBY wide-range power pack 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5 MOBY STG U hand-held terminal 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6 Hardware configuration of the STG U 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
vii
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Tables
2-1 Technical data of MOBY U (field components) 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1 Dependence of time tANW on bunch size 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Exit Conditions with an Exit Duration of t23-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Communication times using examples of specific data volumes at
Ccom = 100% and p = 1. 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Typical run times of FC 45 (cycle load of the PLC in ms) 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Typical communication times between the interface module and SLG 3-29. .
3-6 Typical communication times between the interface module and SLG 3-31. .
3-7 Chemical resistance of the data storage units made of polyamide 12 3-51. . .
3-8 Chemical resistance of the MDS U589, which is made of
polyphenylene sulfide 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9 Sources of interference: origin and effect 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10 Causes of coupling paths 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11 Cable configuration 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12 Plug connector allocation of the SLG connector 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13 Cable lengths ASM 452/473 ↔ SLG U92 with RS 422 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14 Cable lengths of ASM 475 ↔ SLG U92 with RS 422 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-15 Cable lengths of ASM 480 ↔ SLG U92 with RS 422 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16 Plug allocation of SLG plug and submin D plug 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17 Cable lengths for PC ↔ SLG U92 with RS 232 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18 Components for individually fabricated cables 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19 Cable lengths of ASM 480 ↔ SLG U92 with RS 232 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20 Connector assignment for the SLG U92 and
9P BU subminiature D connector 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21 Cable lengths for the PC ↔ RS 232 service interface 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22 Functions of the service interface 3-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23 Error codes at the SLG interface in direct addressing 3-125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24 LED states depending on the operating status of the SLG U92 3-127. . . . . . . .
4-1 Overview of the MDS 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 Operational/ambient conditions of the MDS 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 Ordering data for the MDS U313 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 Technical data of the MDS U313 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 Field data of the MDS U313 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6 Ordering data for the MDS U315 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7 Technical data of the MDS U315 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8 Field data of the MDS U315 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9 Ordering data of the MDS 524 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10 Technical data of the MDS U524 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11 Field data of the MDS U524 4-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12 Ordering data for the MDS U525 4-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13 Technical data of the MDS U525 4-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14 Field data of the MDS U525 4-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15 Ordering data of the MDS U589 4-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16 Technical data of the MDS U589 4-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-17 Field data of the MDS U589 4-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18 Cycles of the MDS U589 at its utmost limits 4-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1 Ordering data of the SLG U92 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Technical data of the SLG U92 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Field data for SLG U92 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1 Overview of the interfaces 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Ordering data of the ASM 452 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
viii MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
6-3 Technical data of ASM 452 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Ordering data of the ASM 473 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 Technical data of the ASM 473 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6 Ordering data for ASM 475 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 Technical data of the ASM 475 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8 Function of the LEDs on the ASM 475 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9 Operating states shown by LEDs on the ASM 475 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10 Ordering data of the ASM 480 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11 Technical data of ASM 480 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12 Interfaces of the ASM 480 6-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1 Ordering data for MOBY Software 7-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Ordering data for MOBY wide-range power pack 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Technical data of the MOBY wide-range power pack 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Ordering data for the STG U 7-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5 Technical data of the STG U hand-held terminal 7-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1 Ordering data for descriptions A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1 Classification of the error messages B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2 Error messages of the MOBY ASM/SLG via the error_MOBY variable B-3. .
B-3 “error_FC” error variable B-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-4 “error_Bus” error variable B-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-5 LED displays B-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-6 Evaluation of the ERR LED B-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-7 Evaluation of ANZ0 and ANZ1 error displays B-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-8 Evaluation of the ANZ2 LED B-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-9 Other causes of error B-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-10 Error classes of the FC 56 B-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-11 Error messages via the “error_code” variable B-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-12 Errors indicated by the ERR-LED B-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
1-1
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
General
This manual on configuration, installation, and service will help you to plan
and configure your MOBY U system. It contains the configuration and instal-
lation guidelines and all technical data on the individual components.
The technical support specialists are available to advise and assist you if you
have any queries about the functions of our MOBY products and how to use
them.
You can contact us around the world at any time of day or night by:
Telephone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223
E-mail: adsupport@siemens.com
General news on MOBY U or an overview of our other identification systems
can be found on the Internet under the following address:
http://www.ad.siemens.de/fas
Technical support
Internet
1
1-2 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
General
2-1
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Introduction – MOBY U
MOBY U is an outstanding RF identification system designed specifically for
long-range applications in industry and logistics. It uses the transmission fre-
quency in the ISM frequency band of 2.4 GHz in the UHF range (ultra high
frequency). This ISM frequency band is recognized around the world. It
unites the power of innovative RF technologies and, at the same time, en-
sures continuity at the customer’s by being almost totally compatible with the
proven MOBY I system. Robust housing and power-saving circuiting
technology give you years of maintenance-free operation even under the
most rugged of industrial conditions.
MOBY U covers all transmission distances up to three meters which means
that it meets the prerequisites for a transparent identification solution in the
automotive industry, for instance. It offers the communication distances
(much longer than one meter) required to design optimized working pro-
cesses and ensure necessary safety zones during automobile production.
The transmission frequency and the robust modulation not only give you
transmission distances of several meters but also ensure sufficient distance to
the typical sources of electromagnetic interference in industrial production
plants. With MOBY U, you can forget the old sources of interference such as
welding devices, circuit breakers, pulsed DC drives, and switched-mode
power supplies, as well as all the time-consuming interference suppression
measures needed previously.
Familiar sources of interference during UHF transmission such as reflection,
interference and overranging are handled with appropriate technical measures
on the MOBY U. In addition, special coding procedures ensure that data
transmission is correct and data integrity is preserved. Proven methods and
algorithms of mobile radio technology (GSM, UMTS) have been used for this
purpose by the identification system. Specially designed antennas ensure a
homogenous transmission field so that the mobile data memories (MDSs) are
detected reliably even in difficult locations.
Conflicts with other users of the 2.4 GHz frequency band are avoided by us-
ing very low sending power (less than 10 mW EIRP) and automatic selection
of free and interference-free frequency channels.
The transmitting power in the case of the SLG U92 variant with FCC (see
Table 5-1) is < 50 mV/m at a distance of 3 m.
With its mobile data storage units MDS U524/U525 and MDS U589 (up to
+220 °C cyclically), providing 32 Kbytes of memory, MOBY U fulfills the
requirements for a universal solution in the automotive industry.
Like the MDSs of MOBY U, UHF transponders with selective read/write
functions always require their own power source (battery) for data commu-
nication. This power-saving circuiting technology guarantees years of main-
tenance-free service.
The MDS U315 and MDS U525 mobile data storage units offer the possibil-
ity of replacing the batteries. The service life of the MDS can thus be ex-
tended accordingly.
2
2-2 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Simple and flexible installation of the read/write devices (SLGs) and the mo-
bile data storage units (MDSs) in particular are two common requirements of
all assembly and production lines.
The SLG U92 offers easy system integration via coupling to:
Reliable MOBY interface modules (ASMs) for PROFIBUS DPV1,
TCP/IP and SIMATIC S7
– ASM 452
– ASM 473
– ASM 475
– ASM 480
Directly on a standard PC, SICOMP or PC-PLC
Software tools such as SIMATIC S7 functions (FC) and C library MOBY API
for applications under Windows 98/2000/NT make implementation in spe-
cific applications easy.
As with the other MOBY identification systems, the MDSs can be operated
with direct byte addressing or with the filehandler.
The convenient and powerful filehandler of MOBY I with its file addressing
is directly integrated on the SLG U92 with expanded functions. The MOVE
and LOAD commands of the MOBY I filehandler are a thing of the past. The
SLG always fetches the file management information it needs directly from
the MDS.
MOBY U can be used in three different ways:
1. For existing system solutions with MOBY I compatibility (no bunch/mul-
titag)
– MOBY U with default settings
– Range of up to 1.5 m (fixed setting)
– Byte addressing via absolute addresses
– Filehandler: with unmodified functions and without MOVE and
LOAD commands
2. For existing system solutions with MOBY I compatibility
plus enhancements (no bunch/multitag)
– Just a few enhanced commands for changing the default settings and
requesting diagnostic data
– Range of up to 3 m (to be limited in increments)
3. Full use of MOBY U performance (with bunch/multitag)
– Commands and/or user data with clear allocation due to the MDS
number for bunch/multitag
– Range of up to 3 m (to be limited in increments)
Introduction – MOBY U
2-3
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
With MOBY U, a service and diagnostic interface is installed directly on the
read/write device (SLG) to make commissioning easier. Not only current
transmission parameters can be analyzed here but data communication can
also be logged. In addition, statistical functions are available which allow
quantitative and qualitative information to be produced about data commu-
nication.
MOBY U is primarily used for applications in which objects must be quickly
and reliably identified inductively over long distances (up to three meters)
and the objects are to carry extra production and manufacturing parameters
along with them.
Automobile industry, particularly main assembly lines (raw product
manufacturing, surface treatment and assembly)
Industrial production plants
Container/pallet identification for transportation logistics and distribution
Vehicle identification, vehicle parks, etc.
Traffic control technology
Assembly lines
Table 2-1 Technical data of MOBY U (field components)
Fixed code memory MDS ID number (32 bits)
Read-only memory 128 bits, to be written once by the user
Application memory
Memory technology
Memory size
Memory organization
RAM
2 Kbytes or 32 Kbytes
File or address-oriented
Protection rating IP65 to IP 68
Operating temperature –25 °C to +70/85 °C, 200 °C (cyclical),
220 °C (for a short time)
Data transmission speed, SLG-MDS
(net)
Without bunch With bunch size = 2
Write
Read
Approx.
8.0 Kbyte/sec
Approx.
4.8 Kbyte/sec
Approx.
4.0 Kbyte/sec
Approx.
2.4 Kbyte/sec
Read/write distance 150 mm to 3000 mm
Can be connected to SIMATIC S7, PC, computer, third-party
PLC, PROFIBUS, Industrial Ethernet
Primary
applications
Technical data
Introduction – MOBY U
2-4 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
MDS: mobile data memory
SLG: read/write device
ASM: interface module
STG U: service and test device
ASM 452
for
PROFIBUS DPV1
FC 45/
FC 46/
FC 56/
FC 55 1
ASM 473
for
ET 200X
FC 45/
FC 56/
FC 55 1
ASM 475
for
SIMATIC S7-300/
ET 200M
FC 45/
FC 56/
FC 55 1
PC/computer
V.24/RS 422
MOBY API
SICOMP/IMC
V.24/RS 422
MOBY API
Serial data transmission; max. 115 kbit/s
UHF data transmission, 2.45 GHz
SLG U92
with integrated
antenna
MDS U313/U315
Logistics
MDS U524/U525
Production
MDS U589
220 °C cyclic
ASM 480
for
TCP/IP
MOBY API
1 Under preparation
Figure 2-1 Overview of the MOBY U components
Overview of the
MOBY U
components
Introduction – MOBY U
3-1
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Configuration and Installation Guidelines 3
3-2 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.1 The Fundamentals
MOBY U is a UHF system with powerful features. This makes it much easier
to configure and handle the system.
The range (read/write distance) and communication speed are the same
for all data carriers. However, they do differ in memory size, operational
temperature and lifespan.
Reliable communication due to a homogenous transmission field with
circular polarization in dynamic and static operation. There is no fading
(i.e., temporary ”holes” in the field).
Its range (0.15 m to 3 m) permits MOBY U to be used throughout produc-
tion.
The range of the transmission field can be limited in increments of 0.5 m
up to 3.5 m. This limitation prevents overranging and defines the commu-
nication area clearly.
Familiar sources of interference during UHF transmissions such as reflec-
tion and interference have been removed with appropriate technical mea-
sures.
Due to the transmission frequency and the robust modulation procedures,
electromagnetic sources of interference can be disregarded.
Simple and flexible installation and customized system integration with
standard hardware and standard function blocks make commissioning fast
and easy.
The robust housing and the power-saving circuiting technology make for
years of maintenance-free operation even under the most rugged of pro-
duction environments.
Conflicts with other users of the 2.4 GHz frequency band are avoided by
using very low transmitting power (less than 10 mW EIRP) and automatic
selection of free and interference-free frequency channels.
In the case of the SLG U92 with FCC (see Table 5-1), the transmitting
power is < 50 mV/m at a distance of 3 m.
Optimum utilization does require adherence to certain criteria.
Transmission window and communication area
Dwell time of the MDS in the field (speed and amount of data) during
dynamic transmission
Metal-free space and metallic environment around MDS and SLG
Ambient conditions such as humidity, temperature, chemicals, and so on
Other users of the frequency band at 2.4 GHz
Communications readiness: sleep time, standby mode, antenna on/off
Bunch size for bunch/multitag
System interface performance
SLG synchronization
Proximity switches
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-3
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.1.1 Transmission Window
MOBY U is a UHF system. UHF systems have a relatively long range despite
their low emission power. However, the emission field has a directional char-
acteristic which depends on the antenna construction. To keep the MDS’s
power consumption low and make localization reproducible, MOBY U has
different function zones based on the direction and distance between the SLG
and MDS. The states and reactions of the affected components vary with the
three different zones of the transmission field of the SLG (see Figure 3-1).
SLG U92 with
integrated antenna
MDS
Zone 1: r = max. 3.5 m
can be set
incrementally
Zone 2: r = up to approx. 5 m
Zone 3: r > approx. 5 m or shielded
70°
Direction of
movement of
the MDS
Transmission
field
Figure 3-1 Status zones for the MDS in the transmission field of the SLG U92
Zone 3:
In simplified terms, zone 3 is the UHF-free area. The MDS is asleep and
wakes up to listen for an SLG at the sleep-time intervals once every
< 0.5 sec. (on average 320 ms). Power consumption is very low. If other
UHF users are in the vicinity and they are using the same frequency
range, this does not shorten the battery life of the MDS since it does not
wake up until it receives a special code.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-4 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Zone 2:
If the MDS receives this special code in the vicinity of an active SLG,
it enters zone 2 (see Figure 3-1). Starting immediately it accepts the SLG
and responds briefly with its own ID. However, the SLG ignores all
MDSs which are not in zone 1 (radius can be parameterized on the SLG
in increments). Power consumption in zone 2 is a little higher than in
zone 3.
Zone 1:
When an MDS enters zone 1, it is registered by the SLG and can begin
exchanging data. All read and write functions can now be performed. The
power consumption of the MDS increases briefly during communication.
Since transmission through the air is very fast, total communication time
is very short. The entire 32 Kbyte data memory can be read in less than
eight seconds. This means that data communication hardly uses the bat-
tery.
As long as the MDS is located in zone 1, it is ready to exchange data
when requested by the SLG. When no command for the MDS is queued,
it still reports at regular parameterizable intervals with its ID when re-
quested by the SLG. Its behavior then corresponds to that in zone 2, and
power consumption drops again accordingly.
The transmission window is the range in which communication between the
SLG and the MDS has to take place. The transmission window is determined
by:
the transmission fields of the SLG and MDS
the mechanical arrangement of the SLG and MDS in relation to each
other
the parameterized range (zone 1)
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-5
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
With MOBY U as a UHF system, the following physical characteristics
must be considered when you configure the system.
The waves in the UHF range spread out in straight lines.
The transmission field of the SLG (zones 1 and 2) is shaped like an el-
lipse.
The range of the transmission ellipse of up to 3.5 m can be adjusted incre-
mentally for better identification of the MDS.
In simplified terms, the transmission field of the SLG can be thought of as
a cone and the midpoint of the antenna is located at the peak of this cone.
The field fans out with coverage of approx. 70°. A primarily homogenous
field is then assumed within this parameterized range. Fading (temporary
”holes” in the field) in this area is offset by technical measures.
In simplified terms, the transmission field of the MDS, as with the SLG,
can be thought of as a cone and the midpoint of the antenna is located at
the peak of this cone. The field fans out with coverage of approx. 60°.
Ideally the MDS should penetrate the transmission cone of the SLG from
its base and exit through the surface area so that the MDS remains as long
as possible in the defined recording field.
If the SLG and MDS are not directly aligned with each other, they should
be arranged in such a way that the Siemens logo is in the same position in
each case (e.g. facing up, down or sideways on each). If this is not pos-
sible, for example because one SLG has to communicate with the MDS
from the left and another SLG from the right, the MDS should be placed
in an upright position (Siemens logo facing upwards) and the SLGs ar-
ranged at right angles to it.
Since metallic surfaces reflect the waves, they can also be used for shield-
ing or even deflection. Particularly in typical production environments,
the wealth of metallic objects ensures a relatively uniform dispersion of
the transmission waves.
For optimum data communication, metal should be avoided at least in the
vicinity of the vertical waves.
Both the MDS and the SLG can be mounted directly on metal.
General configura-
tion rules
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-6 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The quality of the communication is dependent on:
The mechanical arrangement of the SLG and MDS in relation to each
other
The guidance of the MDS through the transmission window
Ambient conditions such as
– metal-free space and the metallic environment around SLG and MDS
– humidity, temperature, chemicals, and so on
– other users and/or interference in the frequency band at 2.45 GHz
– other SLGs and/or
– other MDSs in zone 2
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-7
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.1.2 MOBY Operating Modes
MOBY U offers two types of addressing:
Byte addressing with absolute addresses: direct addressing (normal mode)
Filehandler with logical addressing
There are three types of byte addressing:
1. MOBY I call-compatible for existing system solutions without enhance-
ments
(“short” RESET system message frame and operating mode identifier
= 5)
– MOBY U with default settings
– No bunch/multitag (bunch = 1)
– Range limit fixed at 1.5 m
– BERO mode/SLG synchronization not possible
2. MOBY I call-compatible for existing system solutions with enhanced
commands
(“long” RESET system message frame and operating mode identifier = 5)
– No bunch/multitag (bunch = 1)
– Range limit parameterizable up to 3.5 m in 0.5 m increments
– Additional commands such as antenna on/off, MDS status, etc.
– BERO mode/SLG synchronization possible
3. MOBY U with multitag processing (operating mode identifier = 6)
– Bunch/multitag up to a maximum of 12 MDS
MDS commands and/or user data with clear allocation by means of
the MDS number (UID)
– Range limit parameterizable up to 3.5 m in 0.5 m increments
– Full range of commands
– BERO mode/SLG synchronization possible
Set the variant you want using the RESET system message frame.
Note
With byte addressing you can change from one variant to another at any time
using the RESET command.
If you want to change to the filehandler addressing mode, you have to deen-
ergize the SLG. After power-up you can change the addressing mode with
the first RESET message frame.
Normal mode
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-8 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The SIMATIC function FC 45 is available for variants 1 and 2.
The SIMATIC function FC 55 is currently being developed for variant 3.
You can implement applications under Windows 98/2000/NT using the
MOBY API C library:
for each variant when using a serial link to the PC
for variant 3 when using an interface to Ethernet (TCP/IP)
For users who install their application directly on the operating system level
or 3964R driver level and don’t use FC 45 or the C library, the commands for
bytewise addressing are described in the MOBY API C library programming
guide. The 3964R procedure is described in this document in Section 3.9.
There are also three ways to run the filehandler with logical addressing:
1. MOBY I call-compatible for existing system solutions without enhance-
ments
(“short” RESET system message frame and command index = ”I”)
– MOBY U with default settings
– No bunch/multitag (bunch = 1)
– Range limit fixed at 1.5 m
– BERO mode not possible
2. MOBY I call-compatible for existing system solutions with enhanced
commands
(“long” RESET system message frame and command index = ”I”)
– No bunch/multitag (bunch = 1)
– Range limit parameterizable up to 3.5 m in 0.5 m increments
– Additional commands such as antenna on/off, MDS status, etc.
– BERO mode possible
3. MOBY U with multitag processing (command index = ”U”)
– Bunch/multitag up to a maximum of 12 MDS
MDS commands and/or user data with clear allocation by means of
the MDS number
– Range limit parameterizable up to 3.5 m in 0.5 m increments
– Full range of commands
– BERO mode possible
Set the variant you want using the RESET system message frame.
Filehandler
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-9
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Note
With the filehandler you can change from variant 1 to 2 or vice versa at any
time using the RESET command.
If you want to change from variant 1 or 2 of the filehandler to variant 3, you
have to deenergize the SLG. After power-up you can change the variant with
the first RESET message frame. It is the same if you want to change from
variant 3 to variant 1 or 2 within filehandler mode or change from filehan-
dler mode to direct addressing.
The SIMATIC function FC 46 is available for variants 1 and 2.
The SIMATIC function FC 56 is available for variant 3.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-10 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.1.3 Communication Area of the MDS
The MDS must be within the communication area of the SLG for data ex-
change to take place with the SLG. The possible communication area is de-
pendent on zone 1, the range limit and the entry point and exit point of the
MDS in zone 1. The SLG counts the MDS as being present as long as the
MDS is situated in the communication area. If parameterized to do so, the
SLG reports when the MDS enters and exits the communication area.
The following points should be noted to ensure problem-free communication
between the SLG and the MDS:
Zones of the MDS
Mechanical arrangement of the SLG and MDS (see Section 3.3.1)
Range limit (dili, which stands for distance limit)
Entry into zone 1
Exit from zone 1
Length of the communication field
Report of the presence of the MDS
Zone 3 Zone 3Zone 2
Zone 3 Zone 3
70°
Zone 1
Antenna field
Figure 3-2 Antenna field with zones 1 and 2 and the radiuses of the range limit in steps of 0.5 m.
The range limit determines the sizes of zones 1 and 2.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-11
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The MDS is always in one of three zones (logical areas) (see Figure 3-2):
Zone 1: Communication area in which the SLG communicates
with the MDS
The MDS is within the communication-capable field of the SLG.
The communication area is defined by the range limit.
The SLG identifies the MDS as present and ready for commu-
nication (zone 1).
The area formed by the intersections of the lateral limits of the
antenna field with the radius of 3.5 m represents the maximum
size of zone 1, whereas the area formed by the intersections of
the lateral limits of the antenna field with the radius of 0.5 m
represents the minimum size of zone 1. The radius is subject to a
certain degree of tolerance (see the section on the range limit).
Zone 3: Outside the detection area of the SLG
Zone 3 is a UHF-free zone. The SLG can’t ”hear” the MDS. As
far as it is concerned, the MDS is not present.
Zone 2: In the detection area of the SLG without communication
The SLG detects the MDS within this area. The MDS is outside
the communication area defined by the range limit. The detec-
tion area is determined by the quality of transmission and the
transmitting and receiving conditions for the SLG and the MDS.
The SLG only classifies the MDS as present internally.
The MDS is not in the communication area until it reaches or
comes within the set range limit, thus permitting communica-
tion.
The following can be eliminated by setting the range limit (dili, which stands
for distance limit):
Overranging
Reflections
(See Figure 3-2).
The dili (distance limit, i.e. range limit) can be set from 0.5 m to 3.5 m in
increments of 0.5 m.
The distance between the SLG and the MDS, as calculated by the SLG, is
subject to a tolerance (dilitol) of a maximum of –0.3 m to 0.3 m. In the case
of distances under 2.5 m, dilitol is –0.2 m to 0.2 m. This tolerance value must
be added to the parameterized dili value.
Zones of the MDS
Range limit
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-12 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Note
The tolerance values diliTol may be higher
if field conditions are unfavorable, e.g. metal in the wider field
if there are strong reflections from metallic surfaces
if there are several MDSs in the field which influence each other because
of their arrangement in relation to the SLG
if SLGs are close to each other
The MDS is considered to have entered zone 1 when:
It is within the communication-capable field of the SLG, and the SLG
calculates that the distance between itself and the MDS is less than or
equal to dilion.
diliOn +dili )diliTol
Limit values for dilion with:
– A range limit of dili t2.5Ăm: -0.2Ăm vdiliTol v0.2Ăm
diliOn_max +dili )0.2Ăm
diliOn_min +diliĂ-Ă0.2Ăm
– A range limit of dili w2.5Ăm:-0.3Ăm vdiliTol v0.3Ăm
diliOn_max +dili )0.3Ăm
diliOn_min +diliĂ-Ă0.3Ăm
There are three ways in which the MDS can enter zone 1:
a) Before reaching the range limit the MDS enters the SLG’s field where it
is recognized by the SLG for the first time. This means that when the
MDS enters the SLG’s field the field is larger than the range limit (see
Figures 3-3 and 3-4).
b) The MDS enters the SLG’s field within the tolerance range of the range
limit and is recognized for the first time in the tolerance range. This
means that when the MDS enters the SLG’s field the range limit overlaps
with the tolerance range of the field (see Figure 3-5).
c) The MDS does not enter the field of the SLG until it has crossed the range
limit and is detected there for the first time. This means that when the
MDS enters the SLG’s field the distance is already less than the range
limit. At this point the field does not reach the range limit (see Fi-
gure 3-6).
Entry in
Zone 1
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-13
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
dili = 2.0 m
dilion_max = 2.2 m
dilion_min = 1.8 m
Zone 3 Zone 3Zone 2
Entry into
zone 1
Zone 1
MDS
Zone 3 Zone 3
70°
dili dilion_min
dilion_max
Figure 3-3 Example of case a) when the range limit dili = 2.0 m
Case:
a) The MDS enters the SLG’s field and is detected by the SLG for the first
time before it reaches the range limit.
MDS detected for the first time
SLG is aware of the
MDS
Communication area
Zone 3 Zone 2 Zone 1
dilion_max dilion_min Tolerance range dilitol
Figure 3-4 Entry into zone 1 (before dilion_max is reached)
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-14 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
b) The MDS enters the SLG’s field within the tolerance range of the range
limit and is detected for the first time.
MDS detected for the first time
SLG is aware of the MDS
Communication area
Zone 3 Zone 2
Zone 1
dilion_max dilion_min Tolerance range dilitol
Figure 3-5 Entry into zone 1 (within the tolerance range of the range limit dilitol)
The size of zone 2 depends on the point within the tolerance range at which
the MDS enters the field and on the fluctuation range of the measured range.
c) The MDS does not enter the field of the SLG until it has crossed the range
limit and is detected there for the first time.
Communication area
MDS detected for the first time
SLG is aware of the MDS
Zone 3
Zone 2
Zone 1
dilion_max
dilion_min Tcom, as of which commu-
nication is OK.
Figure 3-6 Entry into zone 1 (after the MDS crosses the range limit dilion_min)
Tcom is the tolerance range for the start of communication. It is a range con-
sisting of a few centimeters in which the SLG detects the MDS for the first
time after the range limit is crossed and in which the SLG recognizes the
MDS as being present (depending on the transmission and reception quality).
Communication with the MDS starts if there is a command pending.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-15
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The MDS exits zone 1 when:
The MDS is in the SLG’s communication field, there is no communica-
tion between the SLG and MDS, and the SLG has calculated the distance
between the SLG and MDS as being greater than dilioff.
The MDS exits the SLG’s communication field although the range limit
dilioff has not yet been exceeded.
The MDS has been hidden for a time longer than tANW due to some prob-
lem. The time tANW is dependent on the set bunch size (see table below).
Table 3-1 Dependence of time tANW on bunch size
Bunch size tANW (in seconds)
1 ... 2
3 ... 4
5 ... 6
7 ... 8
9 ... 12
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
Because the value measured for the range limit is subject to fluctuation of up
to –0.3 m to 0.3 m, the dilioff value for the exit from zone 1 must be greater
than the maximum dilion value. To ensure this is the case, an offset value
dilioffset of 0.5 m is added to dilion for the exit.
diliOff +dili )diliOff )diliTol diliOff +0.5Ăm
Limit values for dilioff for:
– A range limit of dili t2.0Ăm: -0.2Ăm vdiliTol v0.2Ăm
diliOff_max +dili )0.5Ăm )0.2Ăm +dili )0.7Ăm
diliOff_min +dili )0.5ĂmĂ-Ă0.2Ăm +dili )0.3Ăm
– A range limit of dili w2.0Ăm:-0.3Ăm vdiliTol v0.3Ăm
diliOff_max +dili )0.5Ăm )0.3Ăm +dili )0.8Ăm
diliOff_min +dili )0.5ĂmĂ-Ă0.3Ăm +dili )0.2Ăm
Note
The range is not checked during communication. This means that if the
range limit dilioff is exceeded during communication, communication is not
terminated; it continues until it is completed. The prerequisite for this is that
the MDS must still be in the communication-capable field.
Exit from zone 1
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-16 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The MDS starts to exit the field once the distance measured is greater than
dilioff and provided the distance in subsequent measurements remains greater
than dilioff.
The SLG normally calculates a distance value each time it measures the dis-
tance. If there is a lot of interference in the field or if there are extensive re-
flections, the calculation can often produce a distance value that is too inac-
curate and that is therefore rejected by the SLG.
The optimum and shortest duration for the exit is attained when the SLG cal-
culates a distance value that is greater than dilioff three times in succession.
The time t2 taken to exit zone 1 depends on the quality of the distance mea-
surement once the exit from zone 1 has begun (i.e. whether the SLG always
calculates a valid distance value or how often it cannot calculate a distance
value).
Table 3-2 Exit Conditions with an Exit Duration of t2
Case Exit Conditions Exit Duration t2
1The MDS exits zone 1 optimally. ≈ 1.0 sec
2The MDS exits zone 1 in normal conditions. ≈ 1.3 sec
3The MDS exits zone 1 in difficult conditions. < 2.2 sec
4The MDS exits zone 1 in very difficult conditions. > 2.2 sec
Note
If the SLG does not hear anything from an MDS in zone 1 for the time tANW
,
it registers it in zone 2 and the time t3 for exiting zone 2 to enter zone 3
starts.
Regardless of the range limit, the SLG no longer considers an MDS to be in
zone 1 if one of the following commands is sent to the SLG by the user ap-
plication.
The “END” command (mode 0): Terminates communication.
The “antenna off” command: Switches the antenna off.
After the END command, the SLG considers the MDS to be in zone 2 log-
ically even if it is physically still in zone 1. The SLG can only communicate
with this MDS again after it has physically exited zone 2 and returned to
zone 1.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-17
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
There are four ways the MDS can exit zone 1:
a) The MDS exits the SLG field after it crosses the range limit. Communica-
tion is terminated before the range limit is reached. This means that when
the MDS exits the SLG’s field the range limit is smaller than the field
(see Figure 3-8).
b) The MDS exits the SLG’s field within the tolerance range of the range
limit. Communication is terminated before the range limit is reached.
This means that when the MDS exits the SLG’s field the range limit over-
laps the tolerance range of the field (see Figures 3-7 and 3-9).
c) The MDS exits the SLG’s field before reaching the range limit. However,
communication is terminated within the range limit and within the field.
This means that the field is smaller than the range limit at this point (see
Figure 3-10).
d) The MDS exits the SLG’s field after crossing the range limit, as in a).
Communication is terminated within the field but only once the range
limit has been crossed (see Figure 3-11).
In this example, the exit point of the MDS from the field does not permit the
maximum range of 2.8 m because the field is not wide enough.
diliOn +2.0 m
diliOff +2.5 m
diliOff_min +2.2 m
diliOff_max +2.5 m
Zone 3 Zone 3
Zone 2
Exit from
zone 1
Zone 1
MDS
Zone 3 Zone 3
70°
dilioff_min dilioff_max
dilion dilioff
with : –0.2 m vdiliTol v0.2 m
with : –0.3 m vdiliTol v0m
Figure 3-7 Example of case b) when the range limit dili = 2.0 m
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-18 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Case:
a) The MDS exits the SLG field after it crosses the range limit. Communica-
tion ends before the range limit is reached.
Communication area
MDS is no longer detected
for the time t3
SLG is aware of the MDS
Zone 3
Zone 1
dilioff_max
dilioff_min
Communication
Tolerance range dilitol
t3
Zone 2
t2
Figure 3-8 Exit from zone 1 (after the range limit is crossed)
t2w1Ăs If the MDS has entered the tolerance range of the range limit
and the SLG detects for a time t2w1Ăs that the MDS has
crossed the range limit, the SLG no longer considers the MDS
to be present in zone 1 but continues to keep it on its internal
”present” list (zone 2).
t3+10Ăs If the SLG doesn’t ”hear” the MDS t3+10Ăs for a time, it re-
moves it from its internal list. The MDS is in zone 3.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-19
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
b) The MDS exits the SLG’s field within the tolerance range of the range
limit. Communication ends before the range limit is reached.
Communication area
MDS is no longer detected for
t2 + t3
SLG is aware of the MDS
Zone 3Zone 1
dilioff_max
dilioff_min
Communication
Tolerance range dilitol
t3
Zone 2
t2
Communication must be completed by
this time or communication is terminated
with error 06 hex.
Figure 3-9 Exit from zone 1 (in the tolerance range of the range limit)
t2w1Ăs If the MDS has entered the tolerance range of the range limit
and the SLG detects for a time t2w1Ăs that the MDS has
crossed the range limit, the SLG no longer considers the MDS
to be present in zone 1 but continues to keep it on its internal
”present” list (zone 2).
t3+10Ăs If the SLG doesn’t ”hear” the MDS t3+10Ăs for a time, it re-
moves it from its internal list. The MDS is in zone 3.
Note
If communication continues right up to the field limit and leads to interfer-
ence, the SLG tries to establish communication again for three seconds after
the last error-free communication. If this is no longer possible, communica-
tion is terminated with error 06 hex.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-20 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
c) The MDS exits the SLG’s field before reaching the range limit. Commu-
nication is, however, terminated within the range limit and the field.
Communication area
MDS is no longer detected for
t2 + t3
SLG is aware of the MDS
Zone 3Zone 1
dilioff_max
dilioff_min
Communication
Tolerance range dilitol
t3
Zone 2
t2
Communication must be completed by
this time or communication is terminated
with error 06 hex.
Figure 3-10 Exit from zone 1 (before the range limit is reached)
t2w1Ăs If the MDS has entered the tolerance range of the range limit
and the SLG detects for a time t2w1Ăs that the MDS has
crossed the range limit, the SLG no longer considers the MDS
to be present in zone 1 but continues to keep it on its internal
”present” list (zone 2).
t3+10Ăs If the SLG doesn’t ”hear” the MDS t3+10Ăs for a time, it re-
moves it from its internal list. The MDS is in zone 3.
Note
Communication must always be completed before the field limit is reached.
If communication is continued right up to the field limit and terminated with
error 06 hex, the MDS is automatically no longer considered to be present. If
presence is parameterized, a message to the effect that the MDS is not present.
If the MDS stops in this tolerance range, there may be further ”present” and
”not present” reports due to field fluctuation.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-21
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
d) The MDS exits the SLG’s field after crossing the range limit, as in a).
Communication is terminated within the field but only once the range
limit is crosse.
Com. area
MDS is no longer
detected
for the time t3
SLG is aware of the MDS
Zone 3Zone 1
dilioff_max
dilioff_min
Communication
Tolerance range dilitol
t3
Zone 2
t2
Communication must be completed by
this time or communication is terminated
with error 06 hex.
Figure 3-11 Exit from zone 1 (outside the range limit)
t2w1Ăs Once the SLG has terminated communication with the MDS
and it detects for a time t2w1Ăs that the MDS has already
crossed the range limit, the SLG no longer considers the MDS
to be present in zone 1 but continues to keep it on its internal
”present” list (zone 2).
t3+10Ăs If the SLG doesn’t ”hear” the MDS t3+10Ăs for a time, it re-
moves it from its internal list. The MDS is in zone 3.
!Caution
If communication is terminated with error 06 hex during the execution of
chained commands, the data that was correctly written to the MDS up until
this command is preserved on the MDS.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-22 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The length of the communication field is determined by the point at which
the MDS enters and exits the communication area.
Where does the MDS enter the SLG’s field?
– Before reaching dilion_max
– Within the tolerance range of dilion
– After crossing dilion_min
Where does the MDS exit the SLG’s field?
– Before reaching dilioff_min
– Within the tolerance range of dilioff
– After crossing dilioff_max
Does the MDS cross dilioff during communication?
–No
–Yes
Is communication terminated by the user application within zone 1 by
means of the “END” command?
–No
–Yes
Is the SLG’s field switched off by the user application within zone 1 by
means of the “antenna off” command ?
–No
–Yes
The SLG considers the MDS to be present if it is in the communication area.
The SLG reports that the MDS has entered or exited the communication area
by means of the ANW_MELD message frame, provided the SLG has been
parameterized accordingly by means of the RESET message frame.
“MDS is present” message
The MDS has entered zone 1.
A pending or subsequently issued command such as Read from MDS or
Write to MDS is executed immediately.
“MDS is not present” message
The MDS has exited zone 1. No further communication with this MDS
takes place.
Note
If several MDSs enter or exit simultaneously, the SLG reports each change
in presence for each MDS individually.
Length of the com-
munication field
Presence reporting
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-23
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.1.4 Dwell Time of the MDS in Zone 1
The dwell time is the time during which the MDS remains in the SLG trans-
mission window and during which the SLG can exchange data with the MDS.
The dwell time is calculated as follows:
tV+L 0.9Ă[m]
VMDSĂƪmńsƫĂ-ĂK
sleepĂ[s]
Where Ksleep +tsleepĂ[s] Fsleep
tV: Dwell time of the MDS
L: Length of the transmission window (zone 1)
VMDS: Speed of the data storage unit in dynamic operation
0.9: Constant factor; compensates for the effects of temperature and
for production tolerances
tsleep: < 0.5 s; Sleep time of the MDS.
Fsleep:w 1; factor for initial detection (presence) of the MDS in the
transmission window.
In static operation the dwell time can be any length. However, it must be long
enough for communication with the MDS to be completed.
In dynamic operation the dwell time is set by the system environment. The
volume of data to be transferred must be adjusted to the dwell time or vice
versa.
The following generally applies:
tVutK
tV: Dwell time of the data storage unit in zone 1 of the SLG
tK: Communication time with the MDS
Note
If there are two or more write and/or read calls, the dwell time is only fully
available for data transfer between the SLG and the MDS provided the MDS
doesn’t go into sleep mode during this time. This means that the MDS must
be kept ”awake” between unchained write and/or read calls. This can be
achieved using the parameterizable standby time. You must remember that
during the standby time power consumption is as great as during data com-
munication.
The MOBYU-KOMM.XLS Excel file on the “Software MOBY” CD-ROM
(> V3.5) can be used to calculate the dwell time.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-24 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.1.5 Communication Times
The communication time between the following, taking the type of usage
into consideration, is:
SLG and MDS tK_SLG
User program, interface module, SLG, and MDS tK_ASM
System, (interface module,) SLG, and MDS tK_SYS
In the case of the communication time tK_SYS further distinctions must be
made according to the type of usage:
– PC/host with MOBY API, SLG (directly connected), and MDS
– PC/host/external PLC without FC/MOBY API, interface module, SLG,
and MDS
– PC/host/external PLC without MOBY API, SLG (directly connected),
and MDS
The communication time tK_SLG between the SLG and MDS is the time that
begins at the start of the write or read operation in the SLG and ends once the
data to be written is all on the MDS or once the data to be read has been re-
ceived by the SLG.
The communication time between the SLG and the MDS depends on the
transmission rate, the data block size (user data), the standby time, and a con-
stant as the internal system time. The transmission rate between the SLG and
the MDS depends on the direction of transmission, the parameterized bunch
size, and the system conditions.
The communication time is looked at differently depending on the direction
of transmission: reading from the MDS or writing to the MDS. It is assumed
for the calculation of the communication time that the command(s) to be exe-
cuted is/are present in the SLG at the time of communication. This means
that communication is executed without interruption and without being af-
fected by the sleep time of the MDS. The time for the detection of the MDS
is not included here. It is included in the calculation of the dwell time and the
communication between the user program, interface module, SLG, and MDS.
The following applies to the calculation of the communication time:
tK_SLGĂĂ +ĂĂ dĂƪByteƫĂĂ ĂĂ tKomĂƪmsńByteƫ
KKOM p
and to the calculation of the maximum amount of user data:
nmaxĂĂ +ĂĂ tV
tKom
d: Amount of write or read data in bytes:
– MDS U313/MDS U315: 1 to 2048 bytes
– MDS U524/MDS U525/MDS U589: 1 to 32768 bytes
Communication
time between the
SLG and the MDS
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-25
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
KKom: Communication efficiency. It should normally be w 90%
Due to interference or poor communication conditions, for example,
communication may take longer as a result of the required ARQ
measures in the SLG (ARQ = Automatic Repeat Request).
P: 1 = no bunch/multitag operation;
2 to 12 = bunch size in the case of bunch/multitag operation.
If the SLG is communicating with several MDS concurrently, the
communication speed decreases in accordance with the bunch size.
tcom: The communication time for writing a byte (= tcom_W) or
reading a byte (= tcom_R).
–t
com_W: The communication time for writing a byte
at Ccom = 100% and p = 1
is between 10 ms and 0.15 ms depending on the volume
of data involved.
In the case of only one byte or data with a length of
d+(n dN))1 there is an offset of 30 ms.
–t
com_R: The communication time for reading a byte at
Ccom = 100% and p = 1 is between 40 ms and 0.30 ms,
depending on the volume of data involved.
The length of the user data in the message frame for communication between
the application and the SLG: 1 to 250 bytes has an influence on communica-
tion time and is included in the calculation.
In the case of applications with FC 45, the length of the user data is 233 by-
tes.
Table 3-3 Communication times using examples of specific data volumes at
Ccom = 100% and p = 1.
Number of bytes tcom_w
[ms/byte]
tcom_r
[ms/byte]
1 50 35
2 10.5 17.5
45.25 8.75
82.625 4.375
16 1.313 2.188
32 0.656 1.094
64 0.328 0.547
108 0.194 0.324
109 10.193 0.385
128 0.164 0.328
144 0.146 0.292
145 20.193 0.290
216 0.130 0.195
217 0.129 0.290
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-26 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 3-3 Communication times using examples of specific data volumes at
Ccom = 100% and p = 1.
Number of bytes tcom_r
[ms/byte]
tcom_w
[ms/byte]
233 0.120 0.270
234 30.334 0.419
512 0.150 0.315
1024 0.130 0.280
2048 0.123 0.267
4096 0.122 0.272
8192 0.122 0.274
16384 0.121 0.272
32768 0.121 0.272
1The data is read via the air interface in blocks of 108 bytes. This means, for
example, that the same amount of time is required to read 109 bytes via the
air interface as to read 216 bytes, and the time per byte is longer than when
only 108 bytes are read.
2The data is written in blocks of 144 bytes via the air interface. This means,
for example, that the same amount of time is required to write 145 bytes via
the air interface as to write 288 bytes, and the time per byte is longer than
when only 144 bytes are written.
3The maximum length of the user data in the message frame for communica-
tion between the user and the SLG is 233 bytes in the case of FC 45. This
means that two message frames are generated when for example 234 bytes
are written or read. The second one only contains one byte. The same time
is required at the air interface for this one byte as for 108 bytes read or 144
bytes written, and the time per byte is higher than for the 233 bytes.
The MOBYU-KOMM.XLS Excel file on the “Software MOBY” CD-ROM
(> V3.5) can be used to calculate the communication time.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-27
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Communication between the user program, the ASM, the SLG and the MDS
is divided up into two stages: ASM and SLG and SLG and MDS. The com-
mand processes that take place between the interface module and the SLG
determine how the communication times add up.
The length of time depends on:
The type of the PLC and the cycle time
The software used
– Normal mode: FC 45
– Filehandler: FC 46, FC 56
The type of interface module (ASM) and the transmission rate at the in-
terface to the SLG
The communication conditions between the SLG and MDS
The communication process depends on whether only one command or chai-
ned commands are sent between the user and the SLG and whether or not
command repetition is used (REPEAT).
Single command without repetition
Commands for a maximum of up to 233 write or read bytes. Larger vol-
umes of data are executed by FC 45 using chained commands.
Chained commands without repetition
Single command with repetition
Chained commands with repetition
Communication
time between the
user program,
ASM, SLG and
MDS
Normal mode with
FC 45
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-28 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Command chaining and repetition are described in the technical documenta-
tion for the FC 45.
The MOBYU-KOMM.XLS Excel file on the “Software MOBY” CD-ROM
(> V3.5) can be used to calculate the communication time.
1. Communication in the case of a READ or WRITE command without rep-
etition.
a) The user starts the single individual command. At the next call of the
FC the command is transferred to the interface module and acknow-
ledged by the interface module. The user and FC are in the wait state.
The communication times between the user and the interface module
can be found in the corresponding documentation.
b) The interface module forwards the command to the SLG and is in the
wait state.
The communication between the interface module and the SLG takes
place asynchronously at a transmission rate of 19200, 57600, or
115200 bps. The default setting for the interface modules is the maxi-
mum transmission rate in each case:
– ASM 452 57600 bps
– ASM 473 57600 bps
– ASM 475 115200 bps
c) If there is an MDS in the transmission window, the SLG processes the
command and communicates with the MDS.
Otherwise, the SLG waits until an MDS enters the transmission win-
dow and then communicates with the MDS.
d) SLG communication with the MDS is completed. The SLG sends the
acknowledgment: read data or the result of the write command to the
ASM. The communication between the SLG and the interface module
takes place asynchronously, as in b).
e) The read data or the result of the write command is passed on to the
user by the interface module the next time the FC is called. The user
receives a ready message.
The following applies when calculating the data throughput:
tK+Cuser )CASM )CSleep )tK_SLG
tK: Communication time between the user, the interface module, the
SLG, and the MDS
CUSER: Constant: These are the times for the start of the command,
transmission of the command to the ASM, transfer of the
acknowledgement from the ASM and command termination in the
user program: communication steps a) and e).
This time depends on the type of the PLC and the cycle time, the
type of the interface module and the transmission rate between
the programmable controller and the interface module.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-29
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 3-4 Typical run times of FC 45 (cycle load of the PLC in ms)
Idle Central ASM in the S7-300 Distributed ASM on the PROFIBUS
S7 CPU run Read MDS Write MDS Read MDS Write MDS
315-2 DP 1.90 3.7 + 0.023 n 3.6 + 0.022 n 3.40 3.60
318-2 DP 0.13 1.0 + 0.010 n 1.3 + 0.007 n 0.40 0.45
416-2 DP 0.10 – – 0.35 0.38
n = number of user data in bytes to be processed for each write and read com-
mand. If more than 233 bytes of MDS data is to be processed by a single
command, enter n = 233 in the table.
The exact values between the user and the interface module can be found in
the corresponding documentation.
CASM: Constant: Time for command transmission between ASM and SLG:
communication steps b) and d). This time depends on the type of the
interface module and the transmission rate between the interface
module and SLG.
CASM +a)b n
a: Constant, depending on the interface module. See Table 3-5.
b: Time for each character to be transferred. See Table 3-5.
n: Number of characters to be transferred in bytes.
Table 3-5 Typical communication times between the interface module and SLG
Constant CASM
ASM 452 ASM 473 ASM 475
Transmis-
sion rate
Read MDS Write
MDS
Read MDS Write
MDS
Read MDS Write
MDS
19200 a = 40;
b = 0.6
a = 40;
b = 0.6
a = 25;
b = 0.6
a = 25;
b = 0.6
a = 50;
b = 0.6
a = 50;
b = 0.6
57600 a = 40;
b = 0.2
a = 40;
b = 0.2
a = 25;
b = 0.2
a = 25;
b = 0.2
a = 40;
b = 0.2
a = 40;
b = 0.2
115200 – – – – a = 40;
b = 0.1
a = 40;
b = 0.1
Csleep: Constant for the time until the SLG can start with the MDS.
CSleep +(1 )1ń3) tsleepĂ[ms]
tsleep: Sleep time of the MDS. See dwell time.
tK_SLG: Communication time for reading or writing between the SLG and
MDS. See the section on the communication time between the SLG
and MDS.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-30 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
In this calculation the MDS is assumed to be present in the transmission win-
dow. If not, the time for communication from the user to the SLG is disre-
garded.
2. Communication when sending chained commands without command rep-
etition (e.g. write 1024 bytes = 5 WRITE commands with 4 x 233 bytes
+ 1 x 92 bytes).
Communication between the user program, the interface module, and the
SLG can be divided into five communication steps.
a) The user starts the individual WRITE command. At the next call of
the FC the command is transferred to the interface module and ack-
nowledged by the interface module. The user and FC are in the wait
state.
The communication times between the user and the interface module
can be found in the corresponding documentation.
b) Once the interface module has received the first command in its ent-
irety, it passes it on to the SLG while receiving any further commands.
It receives and passes on commands concurrently. The interface mo-
dule goes into the wait state after the last command.
c) If there is an MDS in the transmission window, the SLG processes the
first command as soon it has received it in its entirety and communi-
cates with the MDS. In parallel with this, the SLG receives any further
commands.
If there is no MDS in the transmission window, the SLG receives all
the chained commands, waits until an MDS arrives, and then commu-
nicates with the MDS.
d) SLG communication with the MDS is completed.
In the case of chained commands, there are two states in which com-
munication with the MDS is completed:
– A single command in the command chain is completed.
– All the commands in the command chain are completed.
Re single command in the command chain is completed:
The SLG sends the acknowledgement to the ASM after execution of
the single command. This means that the following sequence can oc-
cur in parallel in the SLG:
– The SLG receives the further chained commands from the inter-
face module.
– It processes a command (communication with the MDS).
– It sends to the interface module a corresponding acknowledgment
for the commands executed.
After the last acknowledgment to the interface module, the SLG goes
into the wait state. Communication between the interface module and
SLG is asynchronous.
e) The read data or the result of the write command is passed on to the
user by the interface module the next time the FC is called. The user
receives a ready message.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-31
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The following applies when calculating the data throughput:
tK+CUSER )CASM )CSleep )CK_SLG
tK: Communication time between the user, the interface module, the
SLG, and the MDS
Cuser: Constant: See communication with a READ or WRITE command
without repetition.
CASM: Constant: Time for command transmission between ASM and
SLG: communication steps b) and d). This time depends on the
type of the interface module and the transmission rate between
the interface module and SLG.
CASM +a x)b n
a: Constant, depending on the interface module. See Table 3-6.
b: Time for each character to be transferred. See Table 3-6.
n: Number of characters to be transferred.
x: Number of commands.
x+nń233 The digits after the decimal point in division
must be rounded up.
Table 3-6 Typical communication times between the interface module and SLG
Constant CASM
ASM 452 ASM 473 ASM 475
Transmis-
sion rate
Read MDS Write
MDS
Read MDS Write
MDS
Read MDS Write
MDS
19200 a = 40;
b = 0.6
a = 40;
b = 0.6
a = 25;
b = 0.6
a = 25;
b = 0.6
a = 50;
b = 0.6
a = 50;
b = 0.6
57600 a = 40;
b = 0.2
a = 40;
b = 0.2
a = 25;
b = 0.2
a = 25;
b = 0.2
a = 40;
b = 0.2
a = 40;
b = 0.2
115200 – – – – a = 40;
b = 0.1
a = 40;
b = 0.1
Csleep: Constant for the time until the SLG can start with the MDS.
CSleep +(1 )1ń3) tsleepĂ[ms]
tsleep: Sleep time of the MDS. See dwell time.
KK_SLG: 50 ms; constant for read or write commands between the SLG
and MDS. See the section on the communication time between
the SLG and MDS. In the case of chained commands, the com-
munication time between the SLG and MDS may be disregarded.
It comes within the communication time between the interface
module and SLG.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-32 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
In this calculation the MDS is assumed to be present in the transmission win-
dow. If not, the time for communication from the user to the SLG can be dis-
regarded.
3. Communication in the case of a READ or WRITE command with repeti-
tion.
When the command is to be repeated, it resides in the SLG and is exe-
cuted automatically for each MDS that comes into the transmission win-
dow.
The transfer of the command to the SLG is not included in the commu-
nication process. This reduces the communication time accordingly
compared to with a READ or WRITE command without repetition.
4. Communication in the case of chained commands with command repeti-
tion.
In command repetition, the command chain resides in the SLG and is exe-
cuted automatically for every MDS that comes into the transmission win-
dow.
The transfer of the command chain to the SLG is not included in the com-
munication process. This reduces the communication time accordingly
compared to communication with READ or WRITE chained commands
without command repetition.
Communication between the user program in the PC/host and the MDS is
divided up into two stages:
user program and SLG and SLG and MDS.
Communication times between the user program and SLG
Communication between the PC/host and the SLG is processed asynchro-
nously by means of the 3964R protocol at a transmission rate of
19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, or 115200 bps. The transmission rate
depends on the PC/host and the length of the cable between the PC/host
and the SLG. The transmission rate must be specified in the PC/host as
the master. The SLG automatically adjusts to the transmission rate of the
master.
The communication time depends on the baud rate, the data block size
(user data) and the PC/host: operating system, processor performance,
processor load, etc.
Communication times between the SLG and the MDS
See the communication time between the SLG and the MDS.
Communication
time between
the PC/host with
MOBY API, SLG
and MDS
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-33
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Communication between the user program in the PC/host and the MDS is
divided up into two stages:
user program and SLG and SLG and MDS.
Communication times between the user program and ASM 452, ASM 473
or ASM 475
No further comment can be made here on the communication times be-
cause communication between the PC/host and the interface module takes
place without the standard software components FC or MOBY API, and
the PC/host does not have a general hardware or software configuration,
and there is no discernible system usage.
Communication times between the interface module and SLG
See the communication time between the user program, interface module,
SLG, and MDS.
Communication times between the SLG and the MDS
See the communication time between the SLG and the MDS.
Communication between the user program in the PC/host and the MDS is
divided up into two stages:
user program and SLG and SLG and MDS.
Communication times between the user program and SLG
Communication between the PC/host and the SLG is processed asynchro-
nously by means of the 3964R protocol at a transmission rate of
19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, or 115200 bps. The transmission rate
depends on the PC/host and the length of the cable between the PC/host
and the SLG. The transmission rate must be specified in the PC/host as
the master. The SLG automatically adjusts to the transmission rate of the
master.
The communication time depends on the baud rate, the data block size
(user data) and the PC/host: operating system, processor performance,
processor load, etc.
Communication times between the SLG and the MDS
See the communication time between the SLG and the MDS.
Communication
time between
the PC/host
without FC/
MOBY API, ASM,
SLG and MDS
Communication
time between
the PC/host
without MOBY API,
SLG and MDS
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-34 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.1.6 Battery Life
The battery life of the mobile data storage units MDS U313, MDS U315,
MDS U524, MDS U525 and MDS U589 depends on:
The type of MDS (battery capacity)
The sleep time (in other words, how long it takes the MDS to wake up)
The volume of data to be written to and/or read from the MDS
The system conditions for data communication
The battery capacity and the standard sleep time of 320 ms are fixed. The
volume of data and the system conditions for data communication determine
the service life of the battery.
The Excel file MOBYU-MDS-BATTERIE.XLS on the “Software MOBY”
CD-ROM (> V3.5) can be used to calculate the service life of the battery.
Using the MDS-STATUS command you can find out how much battery life
the MDS has left via the SLG. Enter in the MDS-STATUS command the cur-
rent date in the form of the calendar week and year, and you will be given the
remaining life as a percentage.
The interrogation of the remaining battery life can be made at the end of an
assembly line, for example. If the remaining life is less than 2 %, the MDS
should be replaced.
Note
The calculation of the remaining battery life is based on an assumption of an
ambient temperature of 25 °C. If the ambient temperature is higher or lower,
the actual remaining battery life may differ from the calculated figure. This
means that the MDS has to be replaced sooner.
Calculating the
battery life of the
MDS
Ascertaining the
remaining service
life of the MDS
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-35
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.1.7 Changing the battery on the MDS U315/MDS U525
Note
Only an authorized service technician or a qualified electrical expert is per-
mitted to replace the lithium battery.
!Warning
If the battery is not replaced correctly (for example if there is a short circuit
or excessive heating during soldering) there is a risk of explosion.
1. Release the four screws on the battery compartment cover with a TORX
screwdriver (size TX 10).
Figure 3-12 Underside of the MDS with the battery compartment cover screwed on
2. Pull the discharged battery out of the battery compartment and unsolder it.
Figure 3-13 Open MDS with battery pulled out
Removing a
discharged battery
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-36 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Note
Discharged batteries must be disposed of in accordance with national regula-
tions.
1. Solder on the new battery.
!Caution
Only use the approved make of replacement battery
Pay attention to polarity when soldering in the battery
2. Reset the MDS and OTP memory.
After the battery is soldered in, the MDS can remain in an undefined state.
For this reason the reset signal in the MDS must be regenerated.
To do this, briefly (approx. 1 second) connect a discharged electrolytic capac-
itor parallel to the soldered battery, paying attention to correct polarity. The
capacitor should have a capacitance of at least 470 µF, but no more than
1000 µF, in order to keep the amount of energy taken from the new battery
by the capacitor as small as possible.
Electrolytic capacitor
+–
Figure 3-14 Open MDS with battery soldered in and reset circuit
Inserting a
new battery
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-37
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Note
Make sure that the polarity of the electrolytic capacitor is correct.
(if more than one attempt is made, or more than one MDS), otherwise no
pulse on the supply voltage will be generated. If it is not discharged, the
charge in the electrolytic capacitor will be retained for at least a few min-
utes.
3. Slide the battery into the battery compartment.
4. Place the cover on the battery compartment and screw it down with the
four screws.
Figure 3-15 Underside of the MDS with the battery compartment cover in place
5. Parameterize the MDS with the current date (calendar year and week)
After the battery is changed, the MDS has its full service life again. This is
dependent on the MDS variant, the operating conditions and the volume of
data written/read.
In order to allow calculation of the remaining battery life, therefore, the date
on which the battery was changed (calendar year and week) must be entered
in the MDS.
The date is transferred via the service interface on the SLG U92 with the
battchange function (see Section 3.11.3). The procedure is as follows:
Activate the service interface (see Section 3.11) and perform the following
actions immediately afterwards.
Place the MDS that is to be parameterized in the antenna field of the SLG
Output the data of all active MDSs in the field with the get_mds function
(see Section 3.11.3)
Only the data of the one MDS that is to be parameterized should appear.
If data from several MDSs is output, the other MDSs must be removed
from the field. Then repeat the get_mds command.
Enter the ID number of the MDS (take it from get_mds) and the date of
the battery change (calendar year and month) with the battchange func-
tion
Remove the parameterized MDS from the field
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-38 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Note
Only the MDS that you want to parameterize should be present in the field
during parameterization of the date, otherwise another MDS may be parame-
terized, and its battery life would then be calculated incorrectly.
On the MDS with the new battery, which would not be parameterized, cal-
culation of the remaining battery life would yield no result or a result that is
too short.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-39
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.2 Declaration of conformity
The following products
MOBY U SLG U92 RS 232
MOBY U SLG U92 RS 422
MOBY U MDS U313
MOBY U MDS U315
MOBY U MDS U524
MOBY U MDS U525
MOBY U MDS U589
MOBY U antenna STG U
comply with the basic requirements of the EU Radio and Telecommunica -
tions Terminal Equipment Directive; R&TTE Directive (99/5/EC).
The EU declarations of conformity are held available for the responsible au-
thorities at:
SIEMENS AG Austria
PSE PRO RCD
Erdberger Lände 26
A-1030 Vienna
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-40 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.3 Installation Guidelines
The mobile data storage units (MDSs) and write/read devices (SLGs) com-
municate by radio in the 2.45 GHz range. To ensure interference-free com-
munication, materials that shield against or absorb RF radiation should either
not be in the RF field or only in certain circumstances. In addition, mounting
the MDS and SLG on metal also has an effect on the RF field. To ensure that
the field data described in Section 5.1 are valid, the following points should
be noted at configuration and installation:
The minimum clearance between two adjacent data storage units (see the
MDS data sheets)
The minimum clearance between write/read devices (see the SLG data
sheets)
The MDS and SLG can be mounted directly on metal
The metal-free space if the MDS and SLG are mounted flush in metal
(see the MDS and SLG data sheets)
Installation of the SLG and MDS in metal frames or supports (see the
MDS and SLG data sheets)
Covers for protection against impact and kicking (see the MDS and SLG
data sheets)
The effect of metal on the transmission window
The effect of non-metallic materials/objects on the transmission window
Interference and users in the 2.45 GHz range
Chemical resistance of the mobile data storage units
The following sections explain the transmission window as a function of the
assignment of the SLG and MDS, the effect on the transmission window, in-
terference, and users in the 2.45 GHz range, and the resistance of the mobile
data storage units to chemicals.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-41
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.3.1 Transmission window as a function of the assignment of the SLG
and MDS
The transmission window is the range in which communication between the
SLG and the MDS has to take place. The transmission window is determined
by:
the transmission fields of the SLG and MDS
the mechanical arrangement of the SLG and MDS in relation to each
other
the parameterized range (zone 1)
The general configuration rules (see Section 3.1.1) must be observed when
assigning the SLG to MDSs.
In the following, examples are shown for transmission windows with differ-
ent arrangements of the SLG U92 and the MDSs U313/315/524/525 in rela-
tion to each other and with corresponding directions of movement. The
SLG U92 is the variant without FCC.
The SLG and MDS are arranged in relation to each other such that the Sie-
mens logo is in the same position in each case (for example on top). The
angle of aperture of the SLG antenna (α) is 70 ° and that of the MDS antenna
(β) is 60 °.
The SLG and the MDSs are facing each other with their antenna side and are
aligned in parallel (optimum arrangement).
SLG
MDS
L
S
MDS
Direction of
movement 1 Direction of
movement 2
α
β
Figure 3-16 MDS arranged parallel to SLG; Direction of movement parallel to that
The MDS is moved parallel to the SLG at a distance S from left to right (di-
rection of movement 1) or from right to left (direction of movement 2)
through the field width L. The value of S can be from 0.15 m up to a maxi-
mum of 3 m (limit distance Sg).
SLG and MDS
parallel to each
other
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-42 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
SLG
L
S
MDS
Direction of movement 4
α
β
Direction of movement 3
Figure 3-17 MDS arranged parallel to SLG; Direction of movement perpendicular to
that
The MDS is moved within the length/width of the field L towards the SLG
(direction of movement 3) or away from the SLG (direction of movement 4)
and perpendicular to it. The value of S can be from 0.15 m up to a maximum
of 3 m (limit distance Sg).
The transmission window resulting from the above arrangements (Fig-
ures 3-16 and 3-17) is shown in Figure 3-22.
The antenna side of the SLG is aligned at an angle (γ) of 45 ° to the antenna
side of the MDS.
S
MDS
Direction of move-
ment 2
β
SLG
α
γ
Direction of move-
ment 1
Figure 3-18 Arrangement of SLG at an angle of 45 ° to MDS; direction of movement
in direction of beam from MDS antenna
The MDS is moved in the direction of the beam from its antenna and in so
doing maintains the angle of 45 ° to the SLG. At the distance S is is moved
from left to right (direction of movement 1) or from right to left (direction of
movement 2) through the antenna field of the SLG. The value of S can be
from 0.15 m up to the field limit. The limit distance Sg (3 m) is not reached
with this arrangement.
SLG and MDS
at an angle to each
other
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-43
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
S
MDS
Direction of move-
ment 4
β
SLG
α
γ
Direction of move-
ment 3
Figure 3-19 Arrangement of SLG at an angle of 45 ° to MDS; direction of movement
perpendicular to direction of beam from MDS antenna
The MDS is moved in the antenna field of the SLG perpendicular to the di-
rection of the beam from its antenna and in so doing maintains the angle of
45 ° to the SLG. The value of S can be from 0.15 m up to the field limit. The
limit distance Sg (3 m) is not reached with this arrangement.
The transmission window resulting from the above arrangements (Fig-
ures 3-18 and 3-19) is shown in Figure 3-23.
If the SLG and MDS are set up in a mirror-image arrangement, the transmis-
sion window is displaced in a mirror image accordingly.
The antenna side of the SLG is aligned perpendicular to the antenna side of
the MDS.
SLG
S
MDS
Direction of
movement 1
Direction of
movement 2
α
β
MDS
β
Figure 3-20 MDS arranged perpendicular to SLG; direction of movement in direc-
tion of beam from MDS antenna
The MDS is moved parallel to the SLG at a distance S from left to right
(direction of movement 1) or from right to left (direction of movement 2)
through the antenna field of the SLG. The value of S can be from 0.15 m up
to the field limit. The limit distance Sg (3 m) is not reached with this arrange-
ment.
SLG and MDS
perpendicular to
each other
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-44 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
SLG
S
MDS
Direction of movement 3
Direction of movement 4
α
β
Figure 3-21 MDS arranged perpendicular to SLG; direction of movement perpendi-
cular to direction of beam from MDS antenna
The MDS is moved in the antenna field of the SLG towards the SLG (direc-
tion of movement 3) or away from the SLG (direction of movement 4) and
perpendicular to it. The value of S can be from 0.15 m up to the field limit.
The limit distance Sg (3 m) is not reached with this arrangement.
The transmission window resulting from the above arrangements (Fig-
ures 3-20 and 3-21) is shown in Figure 3-24.
If the MDS is positioned the other way around (opposite direction of beam
from the MDS antenna), the transmission window is displaced in a mirror
image accordingly.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-45
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
–3.5 –3.0 –2.5 –2.0 –1.5 –1.0 –0.5 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
[m]
[m]
SLG
L = 3.0 m
Sa = 2.5 m
Sg = 3.0 m
MDS
Figure 3-22 Transmission window: SLG and MDS parallel to each other
The field edges are shown by the two lines. The field size can fluctuate
slightly due to external influences.
In the inner area the quality of communication can be considered very good
to good. The average communication time between the SLG and MDS can
vary by ±10 % in this area. The MDS can be moved as required in the inner
area of the transmission window with the communication quality remaining
constant, provided that the assignment (angle) of the SLG and MDS remains
unchanged.
The outer area represents the maximum communication area. Between the
inner and outer areas the quality of communication diminishes towards the
outside, and communication ends as soon as the MDS is outside the area.
This means that the communication time may be a multiple of the original
value in extreme cases.
In the direction of radiation from the SLG antenna the communication area is
limited by the range limit.
In applications outside the inner area, an appropriate test should be per-
formed in order to ensure that the quality of communication is still adequate
and that the communication time remains within the required bounds.
Transmission win-
dow with parallel
arrangement
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-46 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The size of the field can be changed by setting the range limit from 0.5 m to
3.5 m in increments of 0.5 m. The range limit set is subject to a tolerance of
±0.2 m to ±0.3 m. The increments are represented by dotted radii.
To obtain the largest field diameter with a working distance Sa of 2.5 m, for
example, the limit distance Sg must be ≥ 3 m. That means that the range limit
must be set to 3.5 m. With a tolerance of ±0.3 m the SLG can then take up
communication within the field at a distance of between 3.2 m and 3.8 m to
the MDS.
At a working distance Sa of 2.5 m the field diameter is 3.0 m = transmission
window L.
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
–3.5 –3 –2.5 –2 –1.5 –1 –0.5 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5
[m]
[m]
SLG
L = 2.7 m
MDS
Figure 3-23 Transmission window: SLG at an angle of 45 ° to MDS
Refer to the explanations above for the significance of the different areas.
If the SLG and MDS are set up in a mirror-image arrangement, the transmis-
sion window is displaced in a mirror image accordingly.
Transmission win-
dow with angled
arrangement
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-47
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
–3.5 –3 –2.5 –2 –1.5 –1 –0.5 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5
[m]
[m]
SLG
L = 1.3 m
MDS
Figure 3-24 Transmission window: SLG and MDS perpendicular to each other
Refer to the explanations above for the significance of the different areas.
If the MDS is positioned the other way around (opposite direction of beam
from the MDS antenna), the transmission window is displaced in a mirror
image accordingly.
The transmission window in Figure 3-24 shows that communication is only
possible in a very restricted area. Communication is only possible at all due
to the fact that the transmission fields are conical. For this reason a test is
required if applications of this type or similar are planned.
Transmission win-
dow with perpen-
dicular arrange-
ment
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-48 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.3.2 The effect of metal on the transmission window
Metal has various effects the transmission window depending on the arrange-
ment or environment: from no noticeable effect to complete prevention of
communication. The category of metal also includes metallized materials, for
example those that are coated with metal or are interwoven with metal to the
extent that they let through sufficient RF radiation or none at all.
The following should be taken into account when considering the effect of
metal on the transmission window:
MDS and SLG mounted directly on metal
SLG and MDS mounted flush on metal (see MDS and SLG data sheets)
SLG and MDS sunk into metal (see MDS and SLG data sheets)
SLG and MDS in metal frames or supports (see MDS and SLG data
sheets)
Metal objects in the near field of the SLG and MDS antennas
Metal objects in the wider field of the SLG and MDS
The MDS and SLG can be mounted directly on metal. This does not cause
any noticeable changes to the field.
The MDS and SLG can be mounted flush on metal. The field geometry of the
MDS is not changed significantly (see also the MDS data sheets). The field
geometry of the SLG is slightly reduced (see also the SLG data sheets).
If the MDS and SLG are mounted sunk into metal, a metal-free space is re-
quired (see the MDS and SLG data sheets).
If the MDS and SLG are mounted in metal frames or supports such as U or
T supports, it depends on the position whether the field geometry is signifi-
cantly changed. The measures suggested for sinking the devices into metal
can also be recommended here (see MDS and SLG data sheets).
Please note that because the antenna is integrated on the upper side of the
MDS and there are two antennas in the SLG, they can be affected by all the
metallic objects in the near field of the antenna. The near field of the antenna
is a half space above the antenna with a radius of approximately 50 mm.
There must not be any metallic objects in this area. If there are metallic ob-
jects in the near field, you should expect a changed antenna field. This can
result in the field being completely shielded.
Mounted on metal
Mounted flush on
metal
Sunk into metal
In metal frames or
supports
Metallic objects in
the near field
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-49
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
If there are metallic or metal-plated objects in the wider field, depending on
their size and spacing they change the antenna field and cause fluctuations in
the field strength. By means of system measures in the SLG this effect can be
reduced as far as possible because fluctuations in field strength can be com-
pensated for.
Since metallic surfaces reflect the waves, they can also be used for shielding
or even deflection. Particularly in typical production environments, the
wealth of metallic objects ensures a relatively uniform dispersion of the
transmission waves.
3.3.3 The effect of non-metallic materials/objects on the transmission
window
Non-metallic objects can also affect the transmission window, depending on
their arrangement or the environment, if they are located in the near field of
the antenna(s) or in the wider field of the SLG and MDS.
The following are examples of this: water, materials containing or soaked in
water, ice, carbon; plastic materials
suitable for RF welding, etc.
Please note that, because the antenna is integrated on the upper side of the
MDS and there are two antennas on the SLG, all non-metallic materials in
the near field of the antenna that absorb RF radiation affect the antenna. The
near field of the antenna is a half space above the antenna with a radius of
approximately 50 mm. There must be no non-metallic objects in this zone
that absorb RF radiation. If there are, you should expect a changed antenna
field. This can lead to the elimination of the field.
If there are non-metallic objects in the wider field that absorb RF radiation,
depending on their size and spacing they can change the antenna field and
lead to the elimination of the field.
Note
RF radiation does not go through human tissue. It is therefore important that
there should be nobody directly between the SLG and the MDS when com-
munication is established or during communication.
If there is somebody there when communication is established, the MDS is
not detected and no communication takes place.
If somebody moves between the SLG and the MDS during communication,
communication is terminated with error 06 hex. This error number indicates
that the MDS has exited the field during communication or communication
has been aborted due to a problem.
Metallic objects
in the wider field
Non-metallic ob-
jects in the near
field
Non-metallic mate-
rials in the wider
field
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-50 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.3.4 Interference and users in the 2.45 GHz range
The selection of the 2.45 GHz frequency band means that there are no indus-
trial contaminating fields.
The functionality of MOBY U possesses a high level of immunity to other
systems:
Narrow-band systems such as SRIF (Serial Radio Interface)
Direct sequence systems such as WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network)
Frequency hopping systems such as Bluetooth
Telephones such as GSM (Groupe Speciale Mobile) and DECT (Digital
Enhanced Cordless Telecommunication)
Due to its very low transmitting power of < 10 mW EIRP and automatic
selection of free and interference-free frequency channels, MOBY U itself
does not cause interference to other users of the 2.45 GHz frequency band.
In the case of the SLG U92 with FCC (see Table 5-1), the transmitting power
is < 50 mV/m at a distance of 3 m.
MOBY U and the following common radio components do not affect each
other provided the specified minimum distances are maintained.
SRIF at a distance of w 1 m
WLAN at a distance of w 3 m
Bluetooth1at a distance of w 3 m
GSM telephone at a distance of w 1 m
DECT telephone at a distance of w 1 m
Two or more SLG U92 units arranged next to each other or whose antenna
fields overlap are potential sources of mutual interference. Communication is
ensured by the automatic selection of free and interference-free frequency
channels (in other words, frequency channels that are not used by the other
SLG).
1 Class 1 device with an output power of 20 dBm/100 MW
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-51
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.3.5 Chemical resistance of the mobile data storage units
Table 3-7 provides an overview of the chemical resistance of the MDS U313
and MDS U524 data storage units made of polyamide 12. One aspect that
should be emphasized is the very good resistance of the plastic housing to
chemicals in the automotive sector (e.g.: oils, greases, diesel fuel, gaso-
line, ...), which are not listed separately.
Table 3-7 Chemical resistance of the data storage units made of polyamide 12
Concentration 20 5C 60 5C
Battery acid 30
Ammonia, gaseous
Ammonia, a. Conc.
10
Benzole
Bleaching liquor (12.5% effective chlo-
rine)
Butane, gaseous, liquid
Butyl acetate
Butan-1-ol
Calcium chloride, a.
Calcium nitrate, a. c.s.
Chlorine
Chrome baths, techn.
Ferric salts, a. c.s.
Acetic acid, a. 50
Ethyl alcohol, a., not denaturized 96
50
Formaldehyde, a. 30
10
FORMALIN
Glycerol
Isopropanol
Potash lye, a. 50
LYSOL
Magnesium salts, a. c.s.
Methyl alcohol, a. 50
Lactic acid, a. 50
10
Polyamide
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-52 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 3-7 Chemical resistance of the data storage units made of polyamide 12
60 5C20 5CConcentration
Sodium carbonate, a. (soda) c.s.
Sodium chloride, a. c.s.
Sodium hydroxide
Blue salts, a. c.s.
Nitrobenzene
Phosphoric acid 10
Propane
Mercury
Nitric acid 10
Hydrochloric acid 10
Sulfur dioxide Low
Sulfuric acid 25
10
Hydrogen sulfide Low
Carbon tetrachloride
Toluene
Detergent High
Softener
Legend:
Resistant
Practically resistant
Resistant with qualifications
Low resistance
No resistance
a. Aqueous solution
c.s. Cold-saturated
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-53
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The housing of the heat-resistant MDS U589 data storage unit consists of
polyphenylene sulfide (PPS). The chemical resistance of the data storage unit
is excellent. We know of no solvent that will dissolve the plastic under
200°C. A reduction in the mechanical properties is observed in aqueous solu-
tions of hydrochloric acid (HCl) and nitric acid (HNO3) at 80 °C.
Resistance to all types of fuel, including methanol, is very good and worth
emphasizing. The following table provides an overview of the chemicals ex-
amined.
Table 3-8 Chemical resistance of the MDS U589, which is made of polyphenylene sulfide
Sbt
Test conditions
Elti
Substance Time
[days]
Tempera-
ture
[5C]
Evaluation
Acetone
Butan-1-ol
Butan-2-one
Butyl acetate
Brake fluid
Calcium chloride (saturated)
Diesel fuel
Diethyl ether
Freon 113
Antifreezing agent
Kerosene
Methanol
Engine oil
Sodium chloride (saturated)
Sodium hydroxide (30%)
Sodium hypochlorite (5%)
Sodium hydroxide solution (30%)
Nitric acid (10%)
Hydrochloric acid (10%)
Sulfuric acid (10%)
(10%)
(30%)
Test fuels:
(FAM-DIN 51 604-A)
Toluene
1, 1, 1-trichloroethane
Xylene
Zinc chloride (saturated)
180
180
180
180
40
40
180
40
40
180
40
180
40
40
180
30
180
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
180
180
180
180
180
40
55
80
60
80
80
80
80
23
23
120
60
60
80
80
80
80
80
93
23
80
23
80
23
80
80
80
80
75
80
80
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
/
–
+
+
–
+
/
+
+
/
+
/
+
+
+
Evaluation: + Resistant, weight increase < 3 % or weight loss < 0.5 % and/or reduction
in tear resistance < 15 %
/ Resistant with qualifications, weight increase 3 to 8 % or weight loss 0.5 to 3 %
and/or reduction in tear resistance of 15 to 30 %
– Non-resistant, weight increase > 8 % or weight loss > 3 % and/or
reduction in tear resistance > 30 %
Polyphenylene
sulfide (PPS)
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-54 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.4 EMC Guidelines
3.4.1 Preface
These EMC guidelines give you information on the following topics.
Why are EMC guidelines necessary?
What outside interference affects the controller?
How can this interference be prevented?
How can this interference be corrected?
Which standards apply to EMC?
Examples of interference-immune plant setup
This description is only meant for ”qualified personnel”:
Project engineers and planners who are responsible for the plant configu-
ration with the MOBY modules and have to adhere to the applicable
guidelines
Technicians and service engineers who have to install the connection
cables based on this description or correct malfunctions covered by these
guidelines
!Warning
Non-adherence to the highlighted information may cause hazardous states in
the plant. Individual components or the entire plant may be destroyed as a
result.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-55
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.4.2 General
Increasing use of electrical and electronic devices creates the following situa-
tion.
Increasing density of the components
Increasing power electronics
Increasing switching speeds
Lower power consumption of the components
The more automation, the greater the danger of the devices interfering with
each other.
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) means the ability of an electrical or
electronic device to function correctly in an electromagnetic environment
without bothering its surroundings up to a certain degree.
EMC can be divided into three areas.
Intrinsic interference immunity:
Immunity against internal (i.e., own) electrical interference
Free interference immunity:
Immunity against outside electromagnetic interference
Degree of interference emission:
Interference emission and influence of the electrical environment
All three areas must be considered when checking an electrical device.
The MOBY modules are checked for adherence to certain limit values. Since
the MOBY modules are only part of a total system and sources of interfer-
ence can be created just by combining different components, the setup of a
plant must adhere to certain guidelines.
EMC measures usually comprise a whole package of measures which must
all be taken to obtain an interference-immune plant.
Note
The constructor of the plant is responsible for adherence to the EMC
guidelines whereas the operator of the plant is responsible for radio inter-
ference suppression for the entire system.
All measures taken while the plant is being set up prevent expensive
modifications and removal of interference later on.
Naturally, the country-specific rules and regulations must be adhered to.
They are not part of this documentation.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-56 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.4.3 Spreading of Interference
The following three components must be present before interference can oc-
cur in a plant.
Source of interference
Coupling path
Potentially susceptible equipment
Potential susceptible
equipment
(malfunctioning device)
Example: ASM 452
Source of interference
(instigator)
Example: Drive
Coupling path
Example: MOBY cable
Figure 3-25 Spreading of Interference
If one of these components is missing (e.g., the coupling path between inter-
ference source and potentially susceptible equipment), the susceptible device
is not affected even when the source is emitting strong interference.
EMC measures affect all three components to prevent malfunctions caused
by interference. When setting up a plant, the constructor must take all pos-
sible precautions to prevent the creation of interference.
Only devices which meet limit value class A of VDE 0871 may be used
in a plant.
All interference-producing devices must be corrected. This includes all
coils and windings.
The cabinet must be designed to prevent mutual interference of the indi-
vidual components or keep this as low as possible.
Precautions must be taken to eliminate external interference.
The next few sections give you tips and hints on good plant setup.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-57
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
To obtain a high degree of electromagnetic compatibility and thus a plant
with low interference, you must know the most frequent sources of interfe-
rence. These sources of interference must then be removed.
Table 3-9 Sources of interference: origin and effect
Interference Source Interference Generator Effect on Susceptible Equip-
ment
Contactor, electronic
l
Contacts Network interference
valves Coils Magnetic field
Electric motor Collector Electrical field
Winding Magnetic field
Electric welding device Contacts Electrical field
Transformer Magnetic field, network interfe-
rence, equalizing current
Power pack, pulsed Circuit Electrical and magnetic field,
network interference
High-frequency devices Circuit Electromagnetic field
Transmitter
(e.g., plant radio)
Antenna Electromagnetic field
Grounding or reference
potential difference
Voltage difference Equalizing current
Operator Static charging Electrical discharge current,
electrical field
High-voltage cable Current flow Electrical and magnetic field,
network interference
High-voltage cable Voltage difference Electrical field
Sources of interfe-
rence
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-58 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Before a source of interference can create actual interference, a coupling path
is needed. There are four types of interference coupling.
MOBY
ASM or
SLG
MOBY
ASM or
SLG
MOBY
ASM or
SLG
MOBY
ASM or
SLG
Galvanic coupling path
Capacitive coupling path
Inductive coupling path
Emission coupling
I
N
T
E
R
F
E
N
C
E
S
O
U
R
C
E
S
U
S
C
E
P
T
I
B
L
E
E
Q
U
I
P
M
E
N
T
Figure 3-26 Possible interference coupling
When MOBY modules are used, various components of the total system can
act as coupling paths.
Table 3-10 Causes of coupling paths
Coupling path Caused by
Cables and lines Wrong or poor installation
Shield missing or connected incorrectly
Poor location of the cables
Switching cabinet or
SIMATIC h i
Equalizing line missing or incorrectly wired
SIMATIC housing Grounding missing or faulty
Unsuitable location
Mounted modules not secure
Poor cabinet layout
Coupling paths
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-59
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.4.4 Cabinet Layout
User responsibility for the configuration of an interference-immune plant
covers cabinet layout, cable installation, grounding connections and correct
shielding of the cables.
Note
Information on EMC-proof cabinet layout can be taken from the setup guide-
lines of the SIMATIC controller.
Magnetic and electrical fields as well as electromagnetic waves can be kept
away from susceptible equipment by providing a metallic housing. The better
induced interference current is able to flow, the weaker the interference field
becomes. For this reason all housing plates or plates in the cabinet must be
connected with each other and good conductivity ensured.
Figure 3-27 Shielding by the housing
When the plates of the switching cabinet are insulated against each other, this
may create a high-frequency-conducting connection with ribbon cables and
high-frequency terminals or RF conductive paste. The larger the connection
surface, the better the high-frequency conductivity. Connection of simple
wires cannot handle this task.
Shielding by
housing
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-60 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Installation of SIMATIC controllers on conductive mounting plates (not pain-
ted) is a good way to get rid of interference. Adhering to the guidelines when
laying out the switching cabinet is a simple way to avoid interference. Power
components (transformers, drives, load power packs) should not be located in
the same room with controller components (relay control parts, SIMATIC).
The following principles apply.
1. The effects of interference decrease the greater the distance between
source of interference and susceptible equipment.
2. Interference can be decreased even more by installing shielding plates.
3. Power lines and high-voltage cables must be installed separately at least
10 cm away from signal lines.
PS
Controller
Drive
Shield
plate
Figure 3-28 Avoidance of interference with optimal layout
Avoidance of inter-
ference with opti-
mized layout
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-61
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Power filters can be used to combat external interference over the power net-
work. In addition to correct dimensioning, proper installation is very impor-
tant. It is essential that the power filter be mounted directly on the cabinet
leadin. This keeps interference current from entering the cabinet by filtering
it out from the beginning.
Power filter
Is
Right
Power filter
Wrong
Is = Interference current
Is
Figure 3-29 Filtering the voltage
Filtering the vol-
tage
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-62 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.4.5 Avoiding Sources of Interference
Inclusion of interference sources in a plant must be avoided to achieve a
higher degree of interference immunity. All switched inductivity is frequently
a source of interference in plants.
Relays, contactors, etc. generate interference voltages which must be sup-
pressed with one of the following circuits.
24 V coils create up to 800 V even with small relays and 220 V coils gener-
ate interference voltages of several kV when the coil is switched. Free wheel-
ing diodes or RC circuits can be used to prevent interference voltage and thus
also inductivity in lines which must be installed parallel to the coil line.
Relay coils
Contactors
Valves
Brakes
Figure 3-30 Suppression of inductivity
Note
All coils in the cabinet must be interference-suppressed. Don’t forget the
valves and motor brakes. A special check must be made for neon lamps in
the switching cabinet.
Suppression of in-
ductivity
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-63
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.4.6 Equipotential Bonding
Differences in potential may be created between the parts of the plant by dif-
fering layout of plant parts and differing voltage levels. When the parts of the
plant are connected with signal lines, equalizing currents flow over the signal
lines. These equalizing currents may distort the signals.
This makes it very important to provide correct equipotential bonding.
The cross section of the equipotential bonding line must be large enough
(at least 10 mm2).
The distance between signal cable and equipotential bonding line must be
as short as possible (effects of antenna).
A fine-wire line must be used (better high-frequency conductivity).
When the equipotential bonding lines are connected to the central equipo-
tential bonding rail, power components and non-power components must
be combined.
Power pack
PLC
EU
EU
EU
Drive
Wrong
Wrong
Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2
Figure 3-31 Equipotential bonding
The better the equipotential bonding in a plant, the less interference is
created by potential fluctuations.
Don’t confuse equipotential bonding with the protective ground of a plant.
Protective ground prevents the creation of high touch voltages on defective
devices.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-64 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.4.7 Shielding the Cables
To suppress interference coupling in the signal cables, these cables must be
shielded.
The best shielding is achieved by installation in steel tubing. However, this is
only required when the signal line has to be led through high interference.
Use of cables with braided shields is usually sufficient. In both cases, correct
connection is decisive for shielding.
Note
A shield which is not connected or is not connected correctly is not a shield.
The following principles apply.
With analog signals, the shield is connected on one side to the receiver
side.
With digital signals, the shield is applied on both sides to the housing.
Since interference signals are frequently in the RF range (> 10 kHz), a
large-surface shield which meets RF requirements is needed.
Figure 3-32 Shielding the cables
The shield bar must be connected (over a large surface for good conductivity)
to the switching cabinet housing. It must be located as close as possible to the
cable leadin. The cables are bared and then clamped to the shield bar (high-
frequency clamps) or bound with cable binders. Make sure that the connec-
tion is very conductive.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-65
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Remove
paint
Cable binder
Figure 3-33 Connecting the shield bar
The shield bar must be connected with the PE bar.
If shielded cables have to be interrupted, the shield must be continued on the
plug case. Only suitable plug connectors may be used.
ÔÔÔÔÔ
ÖÖÖÖ
ÖÖÖÖ
Fold back shield by 180° and
then connect with plug case
Rubber
sleeve
Figure 3-34 Interruption of shielded cables
If intermediate plug connectors which have no shield connection are used,
the shield must be continued with cable clamps at the point of interruption.
This gives you a large-surface, RF conductive connection.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-66 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.4.8 Basic EMC Rules
Often the adherence to a few elementary rules is sufficient to ensure electro-
magnetic compatibility (EMC). The following rules should be observed when
setting up the switching cabinet.
Protect the programmable controller from external interference by instal-
ling it in a cabinet or housing. The cabinet or housing must be included in
the grounding concept.
Shield the programmable controller from electromagnetic fields of induc-
tivity by using divider plates.
Use metallic plug connector cases for shielded data transmission lines.
Connect all inactive metallic parts over a large surface with low ohmic
RF.
Make a large-surface connection between the inactive metallic parts and
the central grounding point.
Don’t forget to include the shield bar in the grounding concept. This
means that the shield bar itself must be connected over a large surface
with ground.
Do not use aluminum parts for grounding connections.
Divide the cables into groups and install the groups separately.
Always install high-voltage cables and signal lines in separate ducts or
bundles.
Always have the entire cabling enter the cabinet on only one side and at
only one level.
Install the signal lines as close as possible to grounding surfaces.
Twist the ”to” and ”from” conductors of individual cables in pairs.
Shielding by the
housing
Surface-shaped
grounding connec-
tion
Planning the cable
installation
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-67
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Shield the data transmission cables and apply the shield on both sides.
Shield the analog cables and apply the shield on one side (e.g., on the
drive).
Always apply the cable shields over a large surface on the cabinet leadin
on the shield bar and affix these with clamps.
Continue the applied shield without interruption up to the module.
Use braided shields and not foil shields.
Use only power filters with metal housing.
Connect the filter housing (over a large surface and with low ohmic RF)
to cabinet ground.
Never secure the filter housing on painted surfaces.
Secure the filter on the cabinet’s entry point or in the direction of the
source of interference.
Shielding the
cables
Power and signal
filters
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-68 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.5 MOBY Shielding Concept
With MOBY U, the data are transferred between interface module and SLG
at a speed of 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps over an RS 422 interface.
The transmission rate cannot be set on the SLG. It is determined by the inter-
face module (ASM), obtained automatically by the SLG after the voltage is
applied, and accepted on completion of successful communication. If the
transmission rate is changed, the voltage of the SLG must be switched off
and then on again. The distance between ASM and SLG can be up to 1000 m.
With respect to cabling, MOBY should be handled like a data processing sys-
tem. Special attention should be paid to shield installation for all data cables.
The following figures shows the primary factors needed for a reliable setup.
3.5.1 SLG Cable between ASM 475 and SLG U92 with RS 422
When the SLG U92 is connected to the ASM 475, it is essential to use a
shield connection terminal for the cable shield. Shield connection terminals
and holder brackets are standard components of the S7-300 product family.
Shield connection
terminal
Holding
bracket
Cable to SLG1 Cable to SLG2
Figure 3-35 Layout of the ASM 475 with shield connecting element
Layout of an
S7-300
with MOBY
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-69
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.6 SLG Cable and Plug Connector Allocations (RS 422)
The jacket used for MOBY SLG connection cables is made of polyurethane
(PUR in acc. w. VDE 0250). This ensures very good cable resistance to oils,
acids, caustic solutions, hydraulic fluids and high resistance to UV.
3.6.1 Cable Configuration
The cable between ASM and SLG has six cores plus shield. Four of these
cores are allocated to the serial data interface. The power supply of the SLG
requires two cores. Regardless of the wire diameter, data can usually be
transmitted up to a distance of 1000 m.
Because of the power consumption of the SLG, voltage drops on the connec-
tion cable. The permitted cable length is therefore usually shorter than
1000 m. It depends on the current consumption of the SLG and the ohmic
resistance of the connection cable. The following table provides an overview
of the permissible cable lengths:
Table 3-11 Cable configuration
Conductor
Cross Section in
mm2
Conductor
Cross Section in
mm
Resistance
W/km1
SLG U92 with RS 422
(I = 300 mA) Max. Cable
Length in m for
UV=24V UV=30V
0.0720.32550 30 70
0,2 0,5 185 85 210
0,5 0,8 70 230 570
0.821.0250 320 800
1.521.4224 660 1000
1 The resistance values are average values. They refer to the ”to” and ”from” conductors.
A single wire has half the specified resistance.
2 When these conductor cross sections are used, crimp contacts must be used in the SLG
connection plug. These crimp contacts are not included with the connection plugs.
Field with gray background:
Recommended by SIEMENS; standard cable LiYC11Y 6 x 0.25, shielded. The cable is
available from SIEMENS under the order number ”6GT2 090-0A...”.
We recommend always grounding the shield of the SLG cable over a large
surface to the grounding rail.
The SLG can also be connected by means of a drum cable.
Recommended cable type: HPM Paartronic 3340-C-PUR 3 2 0.25
The cable can be prepared by the customer.
Grounding of the
SLG cable
Drum cable
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-70 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
When an extra power pack is installed in the vicinity of the SLG, you can
always use the maximum cable length of 1000 m between ASM and SLG.
230 V
SLG
Max. of 1000 m
24 V =
6-core (with 24 V connection)
90 –
Note
The 24 V power supply (pin 2 on
the SLG connector) may not be
connected to the ASM.
Figure 3-36 SLG with extra power pack
The power pack in our drawing can be obtained from Siemens under the
number 6GT2 494-0AA00 (see Section 7.2).
The cable from the extra power pack to the SLG must be provided by the
customer.
3.6.2 Plug Connector Allocations
Table 3-12 Plug connector allocation of the SLG connector
Pin Name
1- Receive
2+24 Volt
3Ground (0 V)
4+ Send
5- Send
6+ Receive
Cable shield
!Caution
When the extra power pack is used in the vicinity of the SLG, do not wire
the +24 V pin to the ASM. (Cf. table 3-12)
Extra power pack
for SLG
1
6
54
3
2
Plug on SLG
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-71
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
If the user has to turn the SLG plug of a prefabricated cable in a different
direction, follow the diagram below and position the contact carrier different-
ly.The plug connector on the SLG cannot be turned.
Knurled screw for vibration-
proof connections (no tools
required)
Removable housing cover for
easy mounting
Cable holder with cage claw
Crimp contacts
for use with
strong vibration*
Contact carrier must be affi-
xed at 7 positions.
* Hand crimp pliers: order from:
Hirschmann,
D-72606 Nürtingen
Tel. +49 (0) 7127/14-1479;
Type XZC0700,
Order no.: 932 507-001
Figure 3-37 Drawing of how to mount the SLG plug connector
Installing the
SLG plug connec-
tor
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-72 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.6.3 Connection cable
6
1
4
5
3
2
two 5-pin round M12 connectors
X1/2
X1/3
X1/1
X1/4
X2/3
X2/1
X1/5
X2/5
X1 X2
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
Pink
SLG plug (socket)
2 m
22,5
18,5
ASM side SLG side
Figure 3-38 Connection cable ASM 452/473 ↔ SLG U92 with RS 422
The connection cable can be ordered in the following lengths.
Table 3-13 Cable lengths ASM 452/473 ↔SLG U92 with RS 422
Length of Stub Line in m Order Number
216GT2 091-1CH20
56GT2 091-1CH50
10 6GT2 091-1CN10
20 6GT2 091-1CN20
50 6GT2 091-1CN50
226GT2 091-2CH20
1 Inexpensive standard length
2 With straight SLG plug
Connection cable
ASM 452/473 ↔
SLG U92 with
RS 422
6GT2 091-1C...
or
6GT2 091-2C...
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-73
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Cable with core sleeves
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Pink
Gray
(Shield)
6
1
4
5
2
3
4 (12)
5 (13)
6 (14)
7 (15)
8 (16)
9 (17)
Cable shield open
16GT2
091-0E... with angled SLG plug (standard)
6GT2 091-2E... with straight SLG plug (not shown)
ASM side SLG side
SLG connector
(socket)1
Figure 3-39 Connection cable ASM 475 ↔ SLG U92 with RS 422
The connection cable can be ordered in the following lengths.
Table 3-14 Cable lengths of ASM 475 ↔SLG U92 with RS 422
Length of Stub Line in m Order Number
26GT2 091-0EH20
56GT2 091-0EH50
10 6GT2 091-0EN10
20 6GT2 091-0EN20
50 6GT2 091-0EN50
216GT2 091-2EH20
516GT2 091-2EH50
1016GT2 091-2EN10
5016GT2 091-2EN50
1 With straight SLG plug
Connection cable
ASM 475 ↔
SLG U92 with
RS 422
6GT2 091-0E...
or
6GT2 091-2E...
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-74 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
6
1
4
5
2
6
1
4
9
Open cable ends
ASM side SLG side
3
Pink
Housing
Connection via
standard terminals
0 V 24 V DC
9-pin submin D
(socket)
SLG
connector
(socket)
Figure 3-40 Connection cable ASM 480 ↔ SLG U92 with RS 422
The connection cable can be ordered in the following lengths.
Table 3-15 Cable lengths of ASM 480 ↔SLG U92 with RS 422
Length of Stub Line in m Order Number
216GT2 091-0EH20
56GT2 091-0EH50
10 6GT2 091-0EN10
20 6GT2 091-0EN20
50 6GT2 091-0EN50
226GT2 091-2EH20
526GT2 091-2EH50
1026GT2 091-2EN10
5026GT2 091-2EN50
1 Inexpensive standard length
2 With straight SLG plug
The power supply to the SLG is provided via the two open cable ends (see
Figure 3-40). The MOBY wide-range power pack is available as an accessory
from Siemens under the number 6GT2 494-0AA00 (see Section 7.2).
Connection cable
ASM 480 ↔
SLG U92 with
RS 422
6GT2 091-0E...
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-75
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.7 SLG cable and connector pin assignments (RS 232) for
serial connection to PC
With MOBY U, the data are transferred between PC and SLG at a speed
of 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps over an RS 232 interface. The trans-
mission rate cannot be set on the SLG. It is obtained automatically after the
voltage is applied and accepted on completion of successful communication.
If the transmission rate is changed, the voltage of the SLG must be switched
off and then on again. The distance between PC and SLG can be up to 32 m.
The SLG cable is comprised of a stub line between PC and SLG and a con-
nection line for the 24 V power supply of the SLG from a standard power
pack (see Section 7.2).
The connection line for the power supply has a fixed length of 5 m.
The stub line between PC and SLG is available in two lengths (5 m and
20 m).
The connection cable for the power supply can be extended with a stub line
(order number 6GT2 491-1HH50).
The jacket used for MOBY SLG connection cables is made of polyurethane
(PUR in acc. w. VDE 0250). This ensures very good cable resistance to oils,
acids, caustic solutions, hydraulic fluids and high resistance to UV.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-76 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.7.1 Cable configuration
The RS 232 cable between PC and SLG has three cores plus shield. The
cable for the power supply of the SLG requires two cores.
We recommend always grounding the shield of the SLG cable over a large
surface to the grounding rail.
The SLG can also be connected by means of a drum cable.
Recommended cable type: HPM Paartronic 3340-C-PUR 3 2 0.25
The cable can be prepared by the customer.
230 V
SLG
Max. of 32 m (with RS 232)
24 V =
90 –
6GT2 494-0AA00
6GT2 591-1C...
Figure 3-41 Wide-range power pack for SLG U92
The power pack in our drawing can be obtained from Siemens under the
number 6GT2 494-0AA00 (see Section 7.2)
3.7.2 Plug Allocations
The pin assignment and assembly of the SLG is described in Section 3.6.2.
Grounding of the
SLG cable
Drum cable
Power pack for
SLG U92
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-77
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.7.3 Connection Cables with Lengths
5 m
5/20 m
N6RFFR
KVPG11 Sensor 763
FPGHR
LIY11Y-6x0.25
5x RBC162/1AG
Nameplate
Sub D 9B
1x RBC162AG
SLG side Power pack/PC side
Figure 3-42 Connection cable for PC ↔ SLG U92
Table 3-16 Plug allocation of SLG plug and submin D plug
SLG (RS 232) N6RFFR Sensor 763 (pin) LIYC11Y Sub D 9B
GND 1 Green 5 (GND)
Vdc+ (power +) 22 (24 V DC) white
Vdc– (power +) 31 (GND) brown
TxD (send data) 4 White 2 (RxD)
n.c. 5
RxD (receive data) 6 Brown 3 (TxD)
Shield GND Shield Housing
The connection cable can be ordered in the following lengths.
Table 3-17 Cable lengths for PC ↔ SLG U92 with RS 232
Length of Stub Line in m Order Number
56GT2 591-1CH50
20 6GT2 591-1CN20
Connection cable
for PC e SLG U92
with RS 232
6GT2 591-1C...
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-78 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Users who want to make their own cables can order the following compo-
nents from the MOBY catalog.
Table 3-18 Components for individually fabricated cables
Component Order Number
SLG connecting plug with socket
contacts for crimping with a straight
output
6GT2 090-0UA00
SLG connecting plug with socket
contacts for crimping (angled)
6GT2 090-0BA00
SLG stub line;
Type: 6 x 0.25 mm2
6GT2 090-0AN50 (50 m)
6GT2 090-0AT12 (120 m)
6GT2 090-0AT80 (800 m)
M12 socket
for extension of the 24 V cable
6GT2 390-1AB00
Non prefabricated
cables
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-79
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.8 SLG cable and connector pin assignments (RS 232) for
ASM 480
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
6
1
4
5
2
3
5
2
n.c.
Open cable ends
ASM side SLG side
3
Pink
Housing
Connection via
standard terminals
0 V 24 V DC
9-pin submin D
(socket)
SLG
connector
(socket)
Figure 3-43 Connection cable ASM 480 ↔ SLG U92 with RS 232
The connection cable can be ordered in the following lengths.
Table 3-19 Cable lengths of ASM 480 ↔SLG U92 with RS 232
Length of Stub Line in m Order Number
216GT2 091-0EH20
56GT2 091-0EH50
10 6GT2 091-0EN10
20 6GT2 091-0EN20
226GT2 091-2EH20
526GT2 091-2EH50
1026GT2 091-2EN10
1 Inexpensive standard length
2 With straight SLG plug
The power supply to the SLG is provided via the two open cable ends (see
Figure 3-43). The MOBY wide-range power pack is available as an accessory
from Siemens under the number 6GT2 494-0AA00 (see Section 7.2).
Connection cable
ASM 480 ↔
SLG U92 with
RS 232
6GT2 091-0EH..
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-80 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.9 3964R Procedure
The following description of the 3964R procedure applies to applications in
which the SLG U92 is used with serial connection to a PC, host computer, or
non-Siemens PLC and
The 3964R procedure is to be implemented, or
The MOBY API C interface is not to be used as a basis.
The 3964R procedure controls bidirectional data transfer for a point-to-point
connection between the SLG U92 and
The interface, e.g. ASM 452, ASM 473 or ASM 475
Another communication partner: PC, host computer, or non-Siemens
PLC.
In the 3964R procedure the data are transferred asynchronously in half-du-
plex mode. The high transmission reliability between the communication
partners is attained by means of:
Defined establishment and cleardown of communication
The parity bit appended to each character to be transmitted (vertical par-
ity)
The use of a block check character (BCC)
Since the loss of characters with a value of 00 hex cannot be detected in the
block check (XORing), transaction reliability is increased by means of other
measures based on the level of the procedure:
The message frame length is sent as well, and
Command message frames with an appropriate structure
Note
The command message frames and their structure are described in the pro-
gramming guide for the MOBY API C library.
Half-duplex (two-way information flow)
The data are transferred between the communication partners in both direc-
tions alternately. At any given time data can be either sent or received.
Serial data transfer takes place asynchronously.
3964R procedure
Direction of
transfer
Type of transfer
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-81
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The data is transferred between the communication partners via the serial in
an 11-bit character frame.
Start bits: 1
Data bits: 8
Parity bits: odd
Stop bits: 1
Note
The specified character frame must be adhered to. It must not be changed.
The 3964R procedure is code-transparent, which means that all characters
between hexadecimal 00 and FF can be transferred.
The following characters and strings are control characters as far as the
3964R procedure is concerned.
Control
character
Co-
ding
(hex)
Meaning
STX 02 Start of Text Start of the string to be
transferred
STX indicates to the partner the wish to send something. A
response is expected within the acknowledgment monitoring
time.
DLE 10 Data Link Escape Switchover to data transfer
Indicates readiness to receive after the receipt of STX.
Positive response to a correctly transferred data block in-
cluding the block check character (BCC).
Precedes the end control character ETX.
ETX 03 End of Text End of the string to be
transferred
DLE ETX 10 03 The string DLE ETX indicates to the partner the end of a data
transfer block.
BCC Block Check Character
NAK 15 Negative Acknowledgment
Data block received with errors
Character delay time tZ exceeded
Transmission error at character level
Character frame
Coding
Control characters
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-82 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Note
If the character DLE occurs as an information character in the data block
(code transparency), it is sent twice to distinguish it from the control charac-
ter DLE. In other words, the 3964R procedure adds a second DLE to indicate
this to the recipient. The recipient hides this duplicated DLE again.
The duplication leads to an increase in the transmission time, and this should
be taken into consideration whether there are a high number of information
characters with the value “DLE”.
If only information characters with the value ”DLE” are transmitted, for ex-
ample, the transmission time is doubled and the transmission rate halved.
Note
In the case of the SLG U92, longitudinal parity (BCC) is set. The partner
therefore also has to supply a block check after the data block’s final control
character.
Note
No blocking is carried out in the 3964R procedure (in other words, large data
blocks are not subdivided into smaller packages of 128 bytes, for example).
The maximum message frame length (net) is 255 bytes.
The parity bit is included for data security. It is appended to each character to
be transmitted (vertical parity).
In addition to the parity bit, the sum of the data bits of the same value of all
the characters in a data transmission block is supplemented by a further bit to
produce an even number (longitudinal parity). The block check character
(BCC) thus formed is itself secured by means of vertical parity and transmit-
ted at the end of the data block. All the characters in the block are included
except for the start control character STX. The block check character is cal-
culated by forming an XOR operation beginning with the first data byte up to
and including the end-of-block control character DLE ETX using the start
value 00 hexadecimal (hex).
Note
In DLE duplication, the added DLE character is included in the block check
(BCC).
Parity bit
Block check
character (BCC)
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-83
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Two different monitoring times (tQ and tZ) are used to monitor the data transfer.
The acknowledgment monitoring time tQ is used after the transmission of:
The control character STX or
The control characters DLE ETX BCC
If no positive acknowledgment is received in this time, the corresponding
control character or, depending on the number of repetitions, the correspond-
ing data block is sent again (see the repetition counter WC or WT).
tQ = 150 ms
Note
If the master cannot adhere to the acknowledgment monitoring time tQ of
150 ms, you can use the set_param function at the service interface (see Sec-
tion 3.11.3) to increase this time to the maximum value of 1200 ms.
The character monitoring time tZ monitors the receipt of the individual cha-
racters of a data block. If the next character is not received within this time,
the recipient aborts the receive job and sends the control character NAK to
the sender.
tZ = 50 ms
Note
If the master cannot adhere to the acknowledgment monitoring time tZ of
50 ms, you can use the set_param function at the service interface (see Sec-
tion 3.11.3) to increase this time to the maximum value of 1200 ms.
Two repetition counters (WC and WT) are used for automatic repetition at
connection establishment or during data transfer. If no acknowledgment or a
negative acknowledgment is received for a transmitted STX control charac-
ter, the control character is repeated and a counter incremented. If this coun-
ter reaches the value WC minus 1, connection establishment is aborted.
WC = 65535
If no acknowledgment or a negative acknowledgment is received for a data
block that is sent, the relevant data block is repeated and a counter incremen-
ted. When this counter reaches the value WT minus 1, the SLG U92 goes into
RESET mode and tries to send this data block with the error status 1B hex in
a continuous loop. The SLG U92 must then be reset with the RESET mes-
sage frame. The SLG U92 sends no further message frames (data blocks) up
to this RESET and rejects all message frames except for RESET with the
error status 18.
WT = 30000
Acknowledgment
monitoring time tQ
Character
monitoring time tZ
Repetition
counter WC
Repetition
counter WT
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-84 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
If both partners want to initiate connection establishment simultaneously in
the 3964R procedure, one of the two communication partners must be assi-
gned a higher priority so that this conflict can be resolved. One communica-
tion partner is thus declared as the ”master” and the other the ”slave” (see the
section on initiation conflict).
Note
The SLG U92 is always a slave, and its partner stations therefore have to
implement or set the behavior of a master.
If both partners want to send something simultaneously during the connection
establishment phase (initiation conflict), the slave has to withdraw its trans-
mission request and respond positively to the transmission request of the ma-
ster with DLE. However, this does not mean that the slave has to abort a
transmission that has already begun (i.e. after a connection has been establis-
hed). It can complete the transmission without being interrupted by the ma-
ster.
If the master has suppressed the transmission request of the slave in this way
and sent its data block, it must then give the slave the opportunity to send its
data before the master sends anything else.
If the SLG U92 has initiated a transmission as a slave (i.e. the connection
establishment phase is completed) and is sending characters, the master can
terminate this transmission at any time by means of an STX and initiate a
transmission itself. The SLG U92 aborts its transmission, replies with DLE,
and changes to receive mode.
If the SLG U92 has initiated a transmission as a slave (i.e. the connection estab-
lishment phase is completed) and is sending characters, the master can terminate
this transmission at any time by means of an NAK. The SLG U92 repeats con-
nection establishment and carries out transmission again.
The two diagrams below show the sequence involved in the 3964R procedure
as it applies to the SLG U92.
Priority
Initiation conflict
Transmission con-
flict (slave)
Transmission ab-
ortion
(slave)
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-85
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
BCC
Idle
state
Character
STX?
No
Connection establishment
Timer
# DLE
# ETX
ETX
DLE
DLE Timer;
Timer tZ
Start and wait
for character
Timer;
Invalid
Character
Copy character
to buffer
Not DLE
Connection establishment
SEND
DLE
Yes
Send NAK
(receive error)
Send DLE
(received OK)
NoYes OK?
Ready to
receive?
Yes
No
and
Timer tZ
Start and wait
for character
Timer tZ
Start and wait
for character
Figure 3-44 3964R receive routine with block check in the SLG U92 (slave)
If a character is not received correctly, e.g. parity error, the receive routine is
aborted with NAK.
3964R receive rou-
tine with block
check in the
SLG U92 (slave)
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-86 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Connection establishment
B
WC
> –1?
Yes
No
Timer; # DLE
and # STX
Idle
state
Send job
Send
STX
C
Received
Character
= DLE?
STX: change to the
receive routine D
W
Cdecre-
ment
DLE or STX
Yes
Send
DLE
Send
DLE
No
No
Receive
STX or
NAK?
Send
further
character?
Yes
Yes
Receive
STX or
NAK?
Yes
Send
DLE
(DLE duplication)
No
No
Yes
STX?
D
E
Timer tQ
Start and wait
for character
Character to
send
= DLE?
A
Yes
No
No
STX: change to the
receive routine
Figure 3-45 3964R send routine with block check in the SLG U92 (slave)
3964R send rou-
tine with block
check in the
SLG U92 (slave)
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-87
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Yes
Send
ETX
No
Yes
No
STX?
Yes
Yes
No
STX?
Send
BCC
No
EA
No
Yes
Connection
cleardown
WT
> –1?
No
No
DLE?
CYes
No
STX?
Yes
Timer
Yes
(Transmission OK)
Set RESET
mode
Receive
STX or
NAK?
Receive
STX or
NAK?
Receive
STX or
NAK?
B
WTdecre-
ment
Timer tQ
Start and wait
for character
D
STX: change to the
receive routine
D
D
STX: change to the
receive routine
Figure 3-46 3964R send routine with block check in the SLG U92 (slave)
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-88 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.10 Service Cable and Connector Assignments
(Service Interface)
The service interface is available for:
– Firmware updating and service/diagnostic functions
– Synchronization of up to three SLG U92 units
– Control of the SLG U92 via BERO contacts
The service interface consists of three subinterfaces:
– An RS 232 interface for service (see Section 3.10.3)
– An interface for synchronization (see Section 3.10.4) and
– An interface for controlling the SLG U92 via BERO contacts (BERO
mode) (see Section 3.10.5).
Different cables are required depending on how the service interface is used.
Note
BERO mode and SLG synchronization are not both possible at the same
time.
3.10.1 Cable configuration
The cables used for the service interface differ depending on whether it used
for:
– The RS 232 interface for service
– The interface for synchronization
– The interface for controlling the SLG U92 via BERO contacts
– Connecting to an interface distributor if more than one subinterface is
required simultaneously.
The cable sheath of the cables used with MOBY U for the service interface
consists of polyurethane (PUR in accordance with VDE 0250). This gives the
cables very good resistance to oil, acid, lye, and hydraulic fluids.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-89
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.10.2 Connector Assignment at the Service Interface
Figure 3-47 shows the assignment for all three subinterfaces.
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
GND
Name
BERO 1
RxD (receive data)
TxD (send data)
SLG-SYNC
Free
Not to be assigned
Free
Free
BERO 2
BERO / SLG-SYNC – GND
GND (ground data)
Cable shield
Figure 3-47 Connector assignment of the SLG U92 service connector
All connections are ESD-protected. The connections can be connected to
ground or incorrectly wired without this damaging the SLG U92.
!Caution
Jumpers between the PINs are not permissible and can lead to the SLG U92
being damaged. It is essential that PIN 6 remains free. It must not be as-
signed.
Complete service
interface
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-90 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.10.3 Connecting Cable for the RS 232 Service Interface
Figure 3-48 Connecting cable PC ↔ RS 232 service interface
The service cable for the RS 232 service interface between the PC and
SLG U92 requires three conductors plus a shield. The maximum permissible
cable length is 20 m.
Table 3-20 Connector assignment for the SLG U92 and
9P BU subminiature D connector
9-pin
subminiature D connector
Core Color Service connector
Pin 3 (TxD) Green Pin 2 (RxD)
Pin 2 (RxD) Brown Pin 3 (TxD)
Pin 5 (Ground) White Pin 11 (Ground)
Housing Shield
All connections are ESD-protected. The connections can be connected to
ground or incorrectly wired without this damaging the SLG U92.
!Caution
Jumpers between the PINs are not permissible and can lead to the SLG U92
being damaged. PIN 6 on the SLG U92 service connector must remain free;
it must not be assigned.
Connection cable
PC ↔ RS 232
service interface
6GT2 591-1A...
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-91
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The service cable can be ordered in lengths of 5 m:
Table 3-21 Cable lengths for the PC ↔ RS 232 service interface
Length of Stub Line in m Order Number
5 6GT2 591-1AH50
If you have to turn the service connector in another direction with a prefabri-
cated cable, proceed as shown in the figure below to reposition the contact
carrier. The plug connector on the SLG cannot be turned.
Removable housing cover for
easy mounting
Cable holder with cage claw
Crimp contacts for
use even with strong
vibration1
Contact carrier must be affi-
xed at 7 positions.
1 You can order the hand crimp pliers from
Hirschmann GmbH & Co. KG
D-72606 Nürtingen
Tel.: +49 (0)7127/14-1479
Type XZC0700
Order no.: 932 507-001
Figure 3-49 Drawing of how to assemble the service connector
Users who want to make their own cables can order the following compo-
nents from the MOBY catalog:
Component Order Number
Connector for the SLG U92 service inter-
face (angled)
6GT2 590-0BA00
Stub line; Type: 6 x 0.25 mm26GT2 090-0A...
Assembly of the
service connector
Non-prefabricated
cable
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-92 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.10.4 Connecting Cable for Synchronization
The connecting cable for synchronization between SLGs requires three con-
ductors plus a shield. The maximum permissible cable length is 30 m.
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
GND
Name
Free
Free
Free
SLG-SYNC
Free
Must not be assigned
Free
Free
Free
SLG-SYNC – GND
Free
Cable shield
Figure 3-50 Connector assignment of the SLG U92 service connector
All connections are ESD-protected. The connections can be connected to
ground or incorrectly wired without this damaging the SLG U92.
!Caution
Jumpers between the PINs are not permissible and can lead to the SLG U92
being damaged.
It is essential that PIN 6 remains free. It must not be assigned.
The following components can be ordered from the MOBY catalog for the
cable to be made up.
Component Order Number
Connector for the SLG U92 service inter-
face (angled)
6GT2 590-0BA00
Stub line; Type: 6 x 0.25 mm26GT2 090-0A...
Connecting cable
SLG ↔ SLG for
synchronization
Non-prefabricated
cable
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-93
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.10.5 Connecting Cable for Control via BERO Contacts
The connecting cable between the SLG and BERO requires two conductors
plus a shield. The maximum permissible cable length is 50 m.
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
GND
Name
BERO 1
Free
Free
Free
Free
Must not be assigned
Free
Free
BERO 2
BERO – GND
GND (ground data)
Cable shield
Figure 3-51 Connector assignment of the SLG U92 service connector
All connections are ESD-protected. The connections can be connected to
ground or incorrectly wired without this damaging the SLG U92.
!Caution
Jumpers between the PINs are not permissible and can lead to the SLG U92
being damaged.
It is essential that PIN 6 remains free. It must not be assigned.
The following components can be ordered from the MOBY catalog for the
cable to be made up.
Component Order Number
Connector for the SLG U92 service inter-
face (angled)
6GT2 590-0BA00
Stub line; Type: 6 x 0.25 mm26GT2 090-0A...
Connecting cable
for control of the
SLG U92 via BERO
contacts
Non-prefabricated
cable
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-94 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.11 Update/Service/Diagnostic Functions
(Service Interface)
The service interface on the RS 232 interface
(see Section 3.7.3) allows you to:
Update the firmware
Execute service/diagnostic functions
Any terminal program can be used for this functionality.
The terminal program must be set as follows to operate the service interface:
Data rate 19200 bps
Parity None
Data bits 8
Stop bits 1
Protocol None
In order to update the firmware using the terminal program, the terminal pro-
gram must have a function for sending a file. It does not matter whether the
file is sent in binary or ASCII mode. The function for sending a file is re-
ferred to differently in the different terminal programs, for example:
Hyperterminal:Transfer – Send Text File
Tera Term:File – Send File
Procomm Plus:Data – Send File
In this case, you also have to select the transfer
type ”RAW ASCII” under Options-Data
Options General-Transfer Protocol.
After the supply voltage is connected to the SLG, the boot loader is started
and the boot menu appears on the service interface.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-95
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
HWTST: Testing RAM..OK
*******************************************
SLG BOOT MENU
VERSION x.xx
*******************************************
Please select menu item:
The system boots after 01 second
(0) Update SLGU version
(1) Update firmware version
(L) Update loader
(E) Update entire flash
(R) Read entire flash
––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Your selection:
Calculated CRC: xxxxxxxx
Stored CRC: xxxxxxxx
Load DSP-Firmware
Execute ...
SIEMENS MOBY U – Service Interface Vxx.xx
>
Note
The version numbers, byte specifications, addresses, and checksums in the
boot menu depend on the firmware version.
The boot menu offers three basic functions:
Boot (boots the firmware)
Update (loads the firmware)
Read (saves the firmware)
When the hardware is switched on, the SLG initializes and tests the storage
areas internally, configures the SLG U, checks the checksums of the indivi-
dual firmware components, and, once the firmware has started up, sends a
startup message frame via the SLG interface. The boot process lasts around
3 seconds from when the voltage is connected to the startup message frame.
The SLG is now ready for operation and waits for the RESET message frame
at the SLG interface. At the service interface it is ready for the input of ser-
vice/diagnostic functions (see Section 3.11.3).
Boot menu
Booting
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-96 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
If you want to load a new or saved firmware version, after the SLG is swit-
ched on and “Your selection:” appears in the boot menu, you have to press
the key 0, 1, L or E, depending on the firmware component to be loaded, wit-
hin 1 second. This interrupts the standard boot process and takes you to the
update function (see Section 3.11.1).
The following firmware components can be loaded individually:
Configuration data (bit stream) for the SLGU
The SLGU is an FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array).
SLG firmware
The SLG firmware consists of the microcontroller firmware and the DSP
firmware.
Loader
The loader is the firmware component that carries out the boot process.
The loader also offers the option of reloading firmware components indi-
vidually, including itself.
Saved firmware version
The loader, the configuration data for the SLG U, the SLG firmware and
special SLG data (such as the SLG ID number and SLG settings) are
stored in the FLASH. All of this FLASH information can be saved as a
firmware version and can be reloaded.
3.11.1 Update Functions
HWTST: Testing RAM..OK
*******************************************
SLG BOOT MENU
VERSION x.xx
*******************************************
Please select menu item:
The system boots after 01 second
(0) Update SLGU version
(1) Update firmware version
(L) Update loader
(E) Update entire flash
(R) Read entire flash
––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Your selection:
The “(0) Update SLGU version” option allows you to update the SLG U con-
figuration data. When you press the 0 key, the Update SLGU version function
is started and the following is output:
Your selection:
(0) Update SLGU version
*******************************************
UPDATE
*******************************************
UPDATE: Updating image: 00 at address 0x00060000
UPDATE: Send the Intel Hex File
Update
Update
SLGU version
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-97
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The SLG configuration data file, which is in Intel hex format, must then be
sent to the service interface. The terminal program’s function for sending a
file must be used for this
(see Section 3.11).
A progress display in the form of dots (...) appears on the screen, indicating
that the file has been received correctly. If the file contains errors, the update
is aborted and the old version of the SLG U configuration data is loaded
again at the next startup.
After the file has been received in its entirety, it is stored initially in a buffer
and then packed and written to flash memory.
If the power fails while flash memory is being written, the update must be
carried out again.
If the new version of the configuration data is saved correctly, it is loaded
immediately and the firmware is executed in its entirety.
The “(1) Update firmware version” option allows you to update the SLG
firmware. When you press the 1 key, the Update firmware version function is
started and the following is output:
Your selection:
(1) Update firmware version
*******************************************
UPDATE IMAGE FROM INTEL HEX FILE
*******************************************
UPDATE: Updating image: 01 at address 0x00008000
UPDATE: Send the Intel Hex File
The firmware file, which is in Intel hex format, must then be sent to the ser-
vice interface. The terminal program’s function for sending a file must be
used for this (see Section 3.11).
A progress display in the form of dots (...) appears on the screen, indicating
that the file has been received correctly. If the file contains errors, the update
is aborted and the old version of the firmware is loaded again at the next
startup.
After the file has been received in its entirety, it is stored initially in a buffer
and then packed and written immediately to flash memory.
If the power fails while flash memory is being written, the update must be
carried out again.
If the new firmware is saved correctly, it is immediately executed.
The “(L) Update loader” option allows you to update the loader.
When you press the ’L’ key, the Update loader function is started and the fol-
lowing is output:
Your selection:
(L) Update loader
*******************************************
LOADER UPDATE
*******************************************
LOADER UPDATE: Send the Intel Hex File
Update firmware
version
Update loader
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-98 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The loader file, which is in Intel hex format, must then be sent to the service
interface. The terminal program’s function for sending a file must be used for
this (see Section 3.11).
A progress display in the form of dots (...) appears on the screen, indicating
that the file has been received correctly. If the file contains errors, the update
is aborted and the old loader is loaded again at the next startup.
After the file has been received in its entirety, it is stored initially in a buffer
and then packed and written immediately to flash memory.
If the new loader has been saved correctly, the still active old loader carries
out a reboot and thus activates the new loader.
!Caution
Ensure there is a reliable power supply for the SLG during the loader update.
If the power fails while the loader is being written to flash memory, the up-
dating of the loader fails and the SLG will no longer work. In this case, boot-
ing is required. This has to be carried out by a service engineer or at the fac-
tory.
The “(E) Update entire flash” option can be used to reload the saved flash
memory contents (see Section 3.11.2) using the “Read entire flash” function.
When you press the ’E’ key, the Update entire flash function is started and
the following is output:
Your selection:
(E) Update entire flash
*******************************************
UPDATE WHOLE FLASH FROM INTEL HEX FILE
*******************************************
FLASHUPDATE: Send the Intel Hex File
The flash memory contents, which are in Intel hex format, must then be sent
to the service interface. The terminal program’s function for sending a file
must be used for this (see Section 3.11).
A progress display in the form of dots (...) appears on the screen, indicating
that the file has been received correctly. If the file contains errors, the update
is aborted and the old version of the firmware is loaded again at the next
startup.
After the file has been received in its entirety, it is stored initially in a buffer
and then packed and written to flash memory.
If the power fails while flash memory is being written, the update must be
carried out again.
If the new firmware is saved correctly, it is loaded immediately and executed.
Update entire flash
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-99
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.11.2 Save firmware version
The loader, the configuration data for the SLGU, the SLG firmware and spe-
cial SLG data (such as the SLG ID number and SLG settings) are stored in
the flash memory. The entire contents of the flash memory can be read out as
a backup file and if needed reloaded with “Update entire flash”
The “(R) Read entire flash” option can be used to read out the entire contents
of the flash memory as a backup file and if needed reloaded. When you press
the ’R’ key, the Read entire flash function is started and the following is out-
put:
Your selection:
(R) Read entire flash
*******************************************
READING WHOLE FLASH TO INTEL HEX FILE
*******************************************
READFLASH: Output start after 10 seconds…
The loader waits for about another 10 seconds. After that, the flash contents
are output sequentially in Intel hex format.
Within the 10 seconds between activation of the function and the start of out-
put the recording function of the terminal program can be started. The func-
tion of the terminal program to be called here is “Capture Text”, “Receive
File” or a similar function.
The receive function is referred to differently in the different terminal pro-
grams, for example:
Hyperterminal:Transfer – Capture Text
Tera Term:File – Log
Procomm Plus:Data – Capture File
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-100 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.11.3 Service/Diagnostic Functions
You can use the service/diagnostic functions to:
Obtain settings and status information from the SLG (read/write device)
Change the settings of the SLG or MDS (mobile data storage units)
Include the service interface in logging
The table below lists the functions that can be called via the service interface.
Table 3-22 Functions of the service interface
Function Meaning
battchange ’mdsid’
’week’ ’year’
Enter parameter for battery change
get_arq Outputs the number of ARQs (Automatic Repeat
Requests) per MDS
get_channel Outputs the setting of the frequency channels
get_cmd Outputs the last message frames from the commu-
nication interface
get_mds Outputs the data of all the active MDSs in the
field
get_param [’parameter’] Outputs one or all SLG parameters
get_spec Reads out the spectrum
get_status or s Outputs the status (diagnostic) data of the SLG
get_version or v Outputs versions from the SLG
help or h Outputs all the available functions of the service
interface
mdslist Outputs an SLG-internal MDS list
mdslog [clear] Outputs the diagnostic data of the detected and
processed MDSs
reboot Restarts the SLG
set_channel
’mode = [0|1]’
’channel_nr = [0–99]’
Disables or enables frequency channels
set_param ’parameter’
’value’ [noflash]
Sets SLG firmware parameters
set_time ’hhhh:mm’ Sets the system time
sleeptime ’mdsid’ ’ms’
’week’ ’year’
Changes the sleep time of the MDS
slgid ’slgid’ Enters an SLG ID number
storemode ’mdsid’ Activates the storage mode of the MDS
trace ’on’|’off’ Activates/deactivates logging of the service inter-
face
eOutputs an overview of the possible error codes
Overview of the
functions
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-101
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Some of the functions have parameters that are specified by means of a sym-
bolic name or alternative values/names, enclosed in quotation marks. Values
to be entered as alternatives are separated by a vertical line.
Example illustrating the storemode function:
Symbolic parameter ’mdsid’:
04B40240 8-digit MDS number
Possible alternative values that can be entered ’0’|’1’:
0 Unlock channel
1 Lock channel
The function name and the first parameter and the parameters themselves
must be separated by a blank.
If a non-existent function is entered or an existing function is entered incor-
rectly, the following error message appears:
Error: Wrong command syntax!
This function initializes an MDS of the “with battery change” type:
MDS U315 or MDS U525 after the battery is changed. This initialization is
essential in order to calculate the remaining battery life.
This command is available as of firmware version 2.19.
Input format:
battchange mdsid week year
Parameter Format Description
mdsid Hexadecimal 8-digit MDS ID number. The MDS ID number can be
requested with the get_mds command.
week Decimal Calendar week:
1 to 52
year Decimal The last two digits of the calendar year:
≥ 01 e.g. 03 for the year 2003
Output format:
Battery Change successfully registered
If the type of the MDS is not “with battery change”, the following message
appears:
Command only valid for type MDS-B
If there is no MDS in the field, the following error message appears:
Error: MDS not in field
battchange
function
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-102 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The function outputs the number of ARQs (Automatic Repeat Requests) per
MDS.
Beginning with the start of the first communication with an MDS, the SLG
increments the counter by the value 1 with each ARQ. After the end of com-
munication the counter is reset to zero.
Input format:
get_arq
Output format:
MDS: mdsid – ARQ: arq, FIRST_COMMAND: fcom
Parameter Format Description
mdsid Hexadecimal 8-digit MDS ID number
arq Decimal Number of ARQs
fcom Decimal Number of failed first commands for the MDS in the
detection and communication area
If the function is entered with parameters, the following error message ap-
pears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: get_arq
If there is no MDS in the field, the following message appears:
No MDS in field!
get_arq
function
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-103
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
This function outputs the setting of the frequency channels.
Input format:
get_channel
Output format:
Channel settings: [EU ex F|FRA|ESP|USA]
Channel 0 – mode
Channel 1 – mode
“
“
Channel 99 – mode
Parameter Format Description
mode Decimal Set mode of the frequency channel:
0 Unlocked
1 Locked
X Permanently locked through the country setting
If the function is entered with parameters, the following error message ap-
pears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: get_channel
If this function is called before or during a RESET command at the SLG in-
terface, or another function is active at this service interface, the following
error message appears:
Error: No Information available!
This function outputs the last 25 message frames from the SLG interface. In
direct addressing, these are the message frames sent to and/or from the SLG
interface. In filehandler mode they are not the filehandler message frames;
instead, the direct addressing commands derived from these internally are
output.
Input format:
get_cmd
Output format:
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
MSG.nr: typ, Time = hhhh:mm:ss.ttt,
Counter = identifier
TLG: Length = length Command = code
Status = state
Data = hh hh hh .. ..
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
ges_anz Messages in SLG
get_channel
function
get_cmd
function
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-104 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Parameter Format Description
nr Decimal Message number; consecutive from 1 to max. 25
typ ASCII Message type:
CMD Command (message frame/command to the
SLG)
RSP Response (message frame/acknowledgment
from the SLG)
hhhh
mm
ss
ttt
Decimal Time stamp in
hhhh Hours (0 to 9999)
mm Minutes (0 to 59)
ss Seconds (0 to 59)
ttt Milliseconds (0 to 999)
identifier Decimal Identifier of the message.
Message frames belonging together: Commands and
acknowledgments at the communication interface have
the same value.
0 to 65535
length Decimal Length of the message frame at the SLG interface (wi-
thout the output byte):
2 to 249
code Hexadecimal 1-digit command code of the message frame at the
SLG interface
state Hexadecimal 2-digit status of the message frame at the SLG inter-
face
hh hh hh .. .. Hexadecimal User data, represented bytewise in hexadecimal nota-
tion. Max. 16 bytes per line.
ges_anz Decimal Number of messages output
If the function is entered with parameters, the following error message ap-
pears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: get_cmd
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-105
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
This function specifies the corresponding data for all the active MDSs in the
detection area (field).
Input format:
get_mds
Output format:
MDSID: mdsid, Distance = distance dm,
Subframe = subframe, ARQ = anz_arq,
StandbyTime = time ms, Status = state,
Sleeptime = sleeptime ms
Parameter Format Description
mdsid Hexadecimal 8-digit MDS ID number
distance Decimal
ASICC
Most recent distance obtained between the SLG and
MDS:
1 to 40 Valid value
x No valid value obtained
subframe Decimal
ASICC
0 to 11 Number of the currently used
subframe (communication
connection active) or
NOT ACTIVE Communication connection
not active
anz_arq Decimal Number of ARQs
time Decimal Standby time in ms (value in message frame
RESET x 7) : 0 to 1400
state ASCII Status of the MDS:
NEW Communication connection
between the SLG and MDS is being
established.
ACTIVE Communication connection
between the SLG and MDS is active;
no command pending.
BUSY Communication connection
between the SLG and MDS is active;
pending command is being
processed.
WAIT Communication connection
between the SLG and MDS is not
active; waiting for connection to be
established for pending command.
STANDBY Communication connection
between the SLG and MDS is active;
no command pending.
END MDS has a status indicating that
communication is completed.
sleeptime Decimal Sleep time of the MDS in ms:
20; 40; 80; 160; 320; 640; 1280 or 2560
get_mds
function
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-106 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
If the function is entered with parameters, the following error message ap-
pears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: get_mds
If there is no MDS in the field, the following message appears:
No MDS in field!
This function outputs the set values for all SLG firmware parameters or the
set value for the selected SLG firmware parameter.
Input format:
get_param
or
get_param parameter
Parameter Format Description
parameter ASCII SLG firmware parameter
monitoring times in the 3964R driver
3964_timeout1 Acknowledgment monitoring time
3964_timeout2 Character monitoring time
SLG synchronization
syncslgs Status number to be synchronized
SLG
syncon Status SLG synchronization
Output format:
parameter = value x
Parameter Format Description
parameter ASCII SLG firmware parameter
monitoring times in the 3964R driver (with value 1)
3964_timeout1 Acknowledgment monitoring time
3964_timeout2 Character monitoring time
SLG synchronization (with value 2 and 3)
syncslgs Status number to be synchronized
SLG
syncon Status SLG synchronization
value 1 Decimal Monitoring time in ms
150 to 1200 Value for acknowledgment monitoring
or 65535 The default of 150 ms applies.
It has not been changed.
50 to 1200 Value for character monitoring
65535 The default of 50 ms applies.
It has not been changed.
get_param
function
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-107
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Parameter DescriptionFormat
value 2 Decimal Status number of SLGs to be synchronized
2 SLG synchronization with 1 SLG
(default)
3 SLG synchronization with 2 SLGs
value 3 Decimal Status SLG synchronization
0 SLG synchronization off
1 SLG synchronization on
If an invalid parameter is entered, the following error message appears:
invalid parameter !
If more than one parameter is entered, the following error message appears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: get_param [’parameter’]
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-108 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
This function shows all frequency channels with the respective setting: un-
locked or locked and a class number. The class number from 0 to 6 of a fre-
quency channel indicates whether field strength has been measured in this
channel and, if yes, how great it is.
Input format:
get_spec
Output format:
Channel –13 – systemlocked – Class = number
Channel –12 – systemlocked – Class = number
“
Channel –2 – systemlocked – Class = number
Channel –1 – systemlocked – Class = number
Channel 0 – [un]locked – Class = number
Channel 1 – [un]locked – Class = number
“
Channel 98 – [un]locked – Class = number
Channel 99 – [un]locked – Class = number
Channel +1 – systemlocked – Class = number
Channel +2 – systemlocked – Class = number
“
Channel +12 – systemlocked – Class = number
Channel +13 – systemlocked – Class = number
Parameter Format Description
number Decimal Measured field strength of the frequency channel in
steps from 0 to 6:
0 No/low field strength
:
6 High field strength
If the function is entered with parameters, the following error message ap-
pears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: get_spec
If this function is called during a RESET command at the SLG interface, or
another function is active at this service interface, the following error mes-
sage appears:
Error: No Information available!
Function
get_spec
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-109
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
This function outputs the status (diagnostic) data of the SLG.
Input format:
get_status or s
Output format:
Time = hhhh:mm:ss.ttt,
SLG status = state Error Counter
frame structure = anz_frame,
Number of MDS = anz_mds, Radio Power = radio_p
MOBY U = mp, Filehandler = fh,
present logic = p_logic, Standby Time = time ms
RWBG = rp, Repeat = repeat_m, Country Code = cc,
Trace = trace_mode, Autobaud = auto_baud
BERO mode = fcon, BERO1_N = bero1, BERO2_N = bero2,
SYNC_RX = sync_rx, SYNC_TX_N = sync_tx
Parameter Format Description
hhhh
mm
ss
ttt
Decimal Time stamp in:
hhhh Hours
mm Minutes
ss Seconds
ttt Milliseconds
state ASCII SLG status:
ok or
Synchronization error counter: = <counter reading>
anz_frame Decimal Number of subframes per frame:
1 to 12
anz_mds Decimal Number of MDSs in the detection area of the SLG:
1 to 12
radio_p ASCII Radio Power:
ON Antenna on
OFF Antenna off
mp ASCII Mode (set by RESET command):
ON MOBY U command variant (with multitag)
OFF MOBY I command variant
(without multitag)
fh ASCII Filehandler mode (set by RESET command):
ON Filehandler mode
OFF Mode with direct addressing
p_logic ASCII Presence (see RESET command):
ON With ”presence” messages
OFF Without ”presence” messages
time Decimal Standby time in ms (see RESET command; value in
message frame x 7):
0 to 1400
rp Decimal Range limit in dm:
5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 or 35
get_status
function
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-110 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Parameter DescriptionFormat
repeat_m ASCII Repeat command:
ON With repeat command
OFF Repeat command not permissible
cc ASCII National variant:
EU ex F EU & France (indoor only)
FRA France (outdoor)
USA USA
trace_mode ASCII Trace mode:
ON
OFF
auto_baud Decimal Automatic baud rate detection:
19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200
fcon ASCII Bero mode (field ON control), see
RESET command:
0 No BEROs (mode 1)
1 One or two BEROs (mode 2)
2 One or two BEROs (mode 3)
bero1 ASCII Status of the line for BERO 1:
0 Active Low
1 Not active High
bero2 ASCII Status of the line for BERO 2:
0 Active Low
1 Not active High
sync_rx ASCII Status of the line for SLG-SNY (receipt of data):
0 Active Low
1 Not active High
sync_tx ASCII Status of the line for SLG-SNY (transmission of data):
0 Active Low
1 Not active High
When the SLG is working properly, the values output must lie within the spe-
cified value ranges, the state parameter (SLG status) must be set to ’ok’, and
the hhhh:mm:ss.ttt parameter (time) must have a value > 0. The time corre-
sponds to the last voltage RESET. The time base can be changed by means of
the set_time function.
If the function is entered with parameters, the following error message ap-
pears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: get_status
or
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: s
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-111
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
This function outputs the HW and FW versions of the SLG.
Input format:
get_version or v
Output format:
SLG FW Version = fw_version
MC FW Version = mc_version
FH FW Version = fh_version
DSP FW Version = dsp_version
SLGU Version = slgu_version
3964R Version = driver
Loader Version = ld_version
HW Version = hw_version
Driver Version = ss
SLG ID = 0xiiiiiiii
CRC = 0xnnnnnnnn
Parameter Format Description
fw_version Decimal Version of the SLG firmware as a whole
xx.xx
mc_version Decimal FW version of the MC (microcontroller)
xx.xx
fh_version Decimal FW version of the filehandler
x.x xxxx
dsp_version Decimal FW version of the DSP (digital signal processor)
xx.xx
slgu_version Decimal FW version of the FPGA SLGU
xx.xx
ld_version Decimal Version of the FW loader
xx.xxx
driver Decimal Driver variant
1 3964 R
hw_version Decimal Version of the SLG HW
xx 1 to 15
ss ASCII Communication interface
RS 232 or
RS 422
0xiiiiiiii Hexadecimal SLG ID number, 8-digit in hexadecimal notation
0xnnnnnnnn Hexadecimal CRC, 8-digit in hexadecimal notation
If the function is entered with parameters, the following error message ap-
pears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: get_version
or
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: v
get_version
function
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-112 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
This function outputs all the available functions of the service interface toge-
ther with the associated parameters.
Input format:
help or h
Output format:
battchange ’mdsid’ ’week’ ’year’
get_arq
get_channel
get_cmd
get_mds
get_param [’parameter’]
get_spec
get_status
get_version
help
mdslist
mdslog [clear]
reboot
set_channel ’mode = [0|1]’ ’channel_nr = [0–99]’
set_param parameter value [noflash]
set_time ’hhh:mm’
sleeptime ’mdsid’ ’ms’ ’week’ ’year’
slgid ’slgid’
trace ’on’|’off’
The functions listed here together with their parameters are described before
and after this section on the help function.
If the function is entered with parameters, the following error message ap-
pears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: help
or
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: h
help
function
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-113
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
This function outputs the SLG-internal MDS list. All the MDSs in the field
are listed in the SLG-internal MDS list.
Input format:
mdslist
Output format:
MDSID: mdsid, FREQ: channel_nr, ANTENNA: mode,
SUBFRAME: subframe, STATE: state, TIMER: time,
DISTANCE: distance
Parameter Format Description
mdsid Hexadecimal 8-digit MDS ID number
channel_nr Decimal Channel number of the reference carrier
13 to 86
mode Decimal Number of the active antenna
0 or 1
subframe Decimal
ASCII
0 to 11 Number of the subframe reserved
for the MDS (regardless of the
communication status) or
NOT AVAILABLE There is no free subframe for
the MDS; they are all reserved
(number of MDSs > frame
structure). Alternatively, the MDS
has the status ZONE 2 or END
(see the state parameter).
state Decimal ACTIVE Communication between the
MDS and SLG.
WAIT Waiting for communication
between the MDS and SLG
(sleep mode).
STANDBY No communication between
the MDS and SLG. The MDS is
kept on standby for the period.
ZONE 2 The MDS is in zone 2.
END The MDS has a status indicating
that communication is completed.
time Decimal Current timer value for the timer-monitored status
(WAIT, STANDBY, ZONE 2, END)
distance Decimal
ASCII
Most recent distance obtained between the SLG and
MDS in decimeters:
1 to 40 Valid value
x No valid value calculated
mdslist
function
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-114 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
If the function is entered with parameters, the following error message ap-
pears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: mdslist
If there is no MDS in the detection area, the following message appears:
No MDS in field!
This function outputs the diagnostic data of the detected and processed
MDSs. It is helpful above all for diagnosis in the event of communication
problems.
The diagnostic data indicates for each MDS when it was detected in zone 1
and when it left zone 1 again. The quality of MDS detection and communica-
tion is recorded with the aid of this detection period, broken down according
to reading and writing.
The diagnostic data from the last 64 MDSs can be stored and output.
The quality of MDS detection is indicated by the number of incorrect notifi-
cations and the rate of valid distance measurements.
When the sleep time of an MDS has expired, the SLG attempts to notify the
MDS and measure the distance to it. As soon as
the MDS is detected for the first time in zone 1 or
the MDS has already been detected in zone 1 and has not yet been found
to be not present,
in other words, as long as the MDS is inside zone 1, every successful or un-
successful distance measurement is included in the rate.
The quality of communication is indicated by the number of ARQs, the
communication times, the time required before the MDS is recognized as
being present and the instances of communication errors.
Input format:
mdslog
or
mdslog clear
Parameter Format Description
clear ASCII Option: delete the log data for MDS in the SLG
The function is executed without an acknowledgement.
Output format for mdslog without parameter clear:
mdsid
id
id
starttime
s-time
s-time
endtime
e-time
e-time
arqw
aw
aw
arqr
ar
ar
fcerr
fce
fce
clost
clo
clo
nerr
ne
ne
dcq
dc
dc
timew
t-w
t-w
timer
t-r
t-r
timep
t-p
t-p
.
.
.
mdslog function
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-115
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
If no log data is stored for MDS, only the header is output without log data.
mdsid starttime endtime arqw arqr fcerr clost nerr dcq timew timer timep
Parameter Format Description
id Hexadecimal 8-digit MDS ID number (mdsid)
s-time Decimal Time at which the MDS is recorded in zone 1 and is
therefore accepted by the SLG (starttime)
Time stamp in:
hhhh Hours
mm Minutes
ss Seconds
ttt Milliseconds
e-time Decimal Time at which the MDS exits zone 1 and is recorded as
no longer present (endtime)
Time stamp in:
hhhh Hours
mm Minutes
ss Seconds
ttt Milliseconds
aw Decimal Number of ARQs (automatic repeat requests) during
writing (arqw)
All write operations during the presence in zone 1 are
recorded.
ar Decimal Number of ARQs (automatic repeat requests) during
reading (arqr)
All read operations during the presence in zone 1 are
recorded.
fce Decimal Number of First Command Errors (fcerr)
Communication problems during the first command
after being recognized as being present
clo Decimal Number of unwanted occasions when the MDS is no
longer recognized as being present because of too
many ARQs (clost)
ne Decimal Number of erroneous notifications (nerr)
dc Decimal Rate, as a percentage, of all valid distance measure-
ments within the detection period (dcq)
t-w Decimal Total communication time in ms during writing, inclu-
ding the processing and sequencing time
(timew)
t-r Decimal Total communication time in ms during reading, inclu-
ding the processing and sequencing time (timer)
t-p Decimal Total sequencing times in ms from receipt of a com-
mand to the successful first command (timep)
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-116 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Output example:
mdsid
007C0181
00640181
starttime
0000:09:32.404
0000:09:54.188
endtime
0000:09:51.584
0000:10:08.174
arqw
0
2
arqr
0
0
fcerr
0
0
clost
0
0
nerr
0
0
dcq
97
100
timew
476
336
timer
42
112
timep
203
140
.
.
.
If the function is entered with an incorrect parameter or an impermissible
number of parameters, the following error message appears:
Error: Wrong Command Syntax!
This function restarts the SLG. In contrast to a power-up after power reco-
very, in the case of this command the firmware is not reloaded by the FPGA
(Field Programmable Gate Array) SLGU.
Input format:
reboot
This function locks or unlocks:
A single frequency channel or
Several frequency channels from ... to ... (frequency range)
Input format:
set_channel mode ch A single frequency channel
set_channel mode ch1–ch2 Several frequency channels from ... to ...
Parameter Format Description
mode Decimal Mode to be set for the frequency channel:
0 Unlock
1 Lock
ch Decimal Number of frequency channel:
0 to 99
ch1 Decimal First number of the range of frequency channels:
0 to 98
ch2 Decimal Last number of the range of frequency channels:
1 to 99 ch2 > ch1
Output format:
Mode mode set
Parameter Format Description
mode Decimal Mode to be set for the frequency channel:
0 Unlock
1 Lock
reboot function
set_channel
function
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-117
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
If the function is entered without parameters or with an impermissible num-
ber of parameters, the following error message appears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: set_channel ’mode [0|1]’
’channel_nr = [0–99]’
If the parameters of this function are incorrect, the following error message
appears:
Error: Wrong Command Syntax!
If an impermissible frequency channel or too many frequency channels are to
be locked, the following error message appears:
Error: Frequency settings not allowed! Restoring old
values.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-118 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
This function sets the default value for the selected SLG firmware parameter.
This value is adopted in flash memory. The noflash option prevents the para-
meter from being written to flash memory and thus from being set perma-
nently. In this case, the setting is lost when the power is switched off or the
reboot service function is executed.
Input format:
set_param parameter value x
or
set_param parameter value x noflash
Parameter Format Description
parameter ASCII SLG firmware parameter
monitoring times in the 3964R driver (with value 1)
3964_timeout1 Acknowledgment monitoring time
3964_timeout2 Character monitoring time
SLG synchronization (with value 2 and 3)
syncslgs Number of SLGs to be synchronized
syncon 1Switch SLG synchronization on/off
value 1 Decimal Monitoring time to be set in ms
150 to 1200 Value for acknowledgment monitoring
50 to 1200 Value for character monitoring
value 2 Decimal Number of SLGs to be synchronized
2 SLG synchronization with 1 SLG
(default)
3 SLG synchronization with 2 SLGs
value 3 Decimal Switch SLG synchronization on/off
0 Switch SLG synchronization off (off)
1 Switch SLG synchronization on (on) 2
noflash ASCII Option for not writing SLG firmware parameters to flash
memory
noflash The SLG parameter is not written to
flash memory.
1 To enable SLG synchronization to be deactivated or activated, the SLG must be reset with the reboot function or by
switching the power off and on.
2 If a BERO mode is set in the reset command, SLG synchronization is not possible and switching it on has no effect.
set_param
function
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-119
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Output format:
set parameter = value x
Parameter Format Description
parameter ASCII SLG firmware parameter
monitoring times in the 3964R driver (with value 1)
3964_timeout1 Acknowledgment monitoring time
3964_timeout2 Character monitoring time
SLG synchronization (with value 2 and 3)
syncslgs Status number to be synchronized
SLG
syncon Status SLG synchronization
value 1 Decimal Monitoring time in ms
150 to 1200 Value for acknowledgment monitoring
50 to 1200 Value for character monitoring
value 2 Decimal Status number of SLGs to be synchronized
2 SLG synchronization with 1 SLG
3 SLG synchronization with 2 SLGs
value 3 Decimal Status SLG synchronization
0 SLG synchronization off
1 SLG synchronization on
If an invalid parameter and/or an invalid value is entered, one of the follow-
ing error messages appears:
invalid parameter !
limits exceeded [’minimum value’–’maximum value’]
If no parameter or an invalid parameter number is entered and/or the parame-
ter value is missing, the following error message appears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage:
set_param ’parameter’ ’value’ [noflash]
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-120 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
This function sets the system time for the service and diagnostic information
at the service interface.
Input format:
set_time hhh:mm
Parameter Format Description
hhhh
mm
Decimal System time in:
hhhh Hours (0 to 999)
mm Minutes (00 to 59)
Output format:
SLG time set to: hhhh:mm:ss.ttt
Parameter Format Description
hhhh
mm
ss
ttt
Decimal Set system time:
hhhh Hours
mm Minutes
ss Seconds
ttt Milliseconds
If the function is entered without parameters or with an impermissible num-
ber of parameters, the following error message appears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: set_time ’hhh:mm’
If the parameters of this function are incorrect, the following error message
appears:
Error: Wrong Command Syntax!
set_time
function
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-121
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
This function changes the sleep-time in the MDS determined by the ID num-
ber. The ID number (8-digit hex number) is obtained with the get_mds com-
mand. It is essential to enter the current calendar week and the current year
because these parameters are stored in the MDS and the remaining battery
capacity is calculated from them.
Input format:
sleeptime mdsid ms week year
Parameter Format Description
mdsid Hexadecimal 8-digit MDS ID number
ms Decimal Sleep-time in ms:
20; 40; 80; 160; 320; 640; 1280 and 2560
week Decimal Calendar week:
1 to 52
year Decimal The last two digits of the calendar year.
w 01 e.g. 01 for the year 2001
Output format:
New sleeptime: mdsnr = mdsid, ms = sleeptime ms
Parameter Format Description
mdsid Hexadecimal 8-digit MDS ID number
sleeptime Decimal Sleep-time in ms:
20; 40; 80; 160; 320; 640; 1280 and 2560
If there is no MDS in the field or the MDS ID number entered matches that
of the MDS in the field, the following error message appears:
Error: MDS not in field!
If the function is entered without parameters or with an impermissible num-
ber of parameters, the following error message appears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: sleeptime ’mdsid’ ’ms’ ’week’ ’year’
If the limit values of the function parameters are exceeded, the following
error message appears:
Error: Parameters out of Range!
If the parameters of this function are incorrect, the following error message
appears:
Error: Wrong Command Syntax!
Note
When the MDS parameter sleep time is changed, the behavior of the MDS in
the field (power consumption, response time, behavior in the bunch, etc.) is
changed!
Function
sleeptime
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-122 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
This function enters the SLG ID number in the SLG. The ID number is 8 he-
xadecimal digits long. If more than 8 digits are entered, the most recently
entered 8 digits apply. The lowermost 10 bits of the SLG ID number are used
for notification.
Input format:
slgid id
Parameter Format Description
id Hexadecimal 8-digit SLG ID number
Output format:
SLG ID set to slgid
Parameter Format Description
slgid Hexadecimal 8-digit SLG ID number
If the function is entered without parameters or with an impermissible num-
ber of parameters, the following error message appears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: slgid ’slgid’
If the parameters of this function are incorrect, the following error message
appears:
Error: Wrong Command Syntax!
Note
The lowermost 10 bits of SLGs that are in close proximity to each other
must be different!
slgid
function
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-123
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
This function activates store mode for the MDS with the ID number mdsid.
Input format:
storemode mdsid
Parameter Format Description
mdsid Hexadecimal 8-digit MDS ID number
Output format:
Store mode switched mdsid
Parameter Format Description
mdsid Hexadecimal 8-digit MDS ID number
If there is no MDS in the field or the MDS ID number entered does not match
that of the MDS in the field, the following error message appears:
Error: MDS not in field!
If the function is entered without parameters or with an impermissible num-
ber of parameters, the following error message appears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: storemode ’mdsid’
If the parameters of this function are incorrect, the following error message
appears:
Error: Wrong Command Syntax!
This switches the logging of the service interface (trace mode) on and off.
The commands/messages of the service interface and the message frames of
the communication interface (each with a time mark and MDS number) are
output. The filehandler message frames are not output in filehandler mode;
they are converted into normal addressing commands instead.
Input format:
trace mode
Parameter Format Description
mode ASCII Trace mode
on Activates trace mode
off Deactivates trace mode
storemode
function
trace
function
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-124 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Output format:
Trace mode switched ’on’|’off’
If the function is entered without parameters or with an impermissible num-
ber of parameters, the following error message appears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: trace ’on’|’off’
If the parameter of this function is incorrect, the following error message ap-
pears:
Trace mode switched OFF
Error: Wrong Command Syntax!
Example of a trace output:
Command reset, acknowledgement reset, presence message, command
MDS status and acknowledgement MDS status
––––––– CMD –––––– Time = 0017:37:57.449
TLG: Length = 10 Command = 0 Status = 0
Data =
C8 25 00 14 00 01 00 00
>
––––––– RSP –––––– Time = 0017:37:57.477
TLG: Length = 5 Command = 0 Status = 0
Data =
01 01 00
>
––––––– RSP –––––– Time = 0017:37:57.603
TLG: Length = 4 Command = F Status = 0
Data =
00 01
>
––––––– CMD –––––– Time = 0017:37:57.645
TLG: Length = 5 Command = B Status = 0
Data =
00 28 01
>
––––––– RSP –––––– Time = 0017:37:57.673
TLG: Length = 18 Command = B Status = 0
Data =
00 50 01 81 84 00 3A 2B DA 08 C9 28 01 FF
FF 04
>
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-125
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Outputs an overview of the possible error codes that can be passed in the sta-
tus byte from the SLG interface in direct addressing. The table “Error codes
at the SLG interface in direct addressing” describes what the different error
numbers mean.
Input format:
e
Output format:
NOMDS_ERROR 0x01
TIME_ERROR 0x02
MDSMEM_ERROR 0x04
CMD_ERROR 0x05
RADIO_ERROR 0x06
MDSERA_ERROR 0x0B
MDSWRT_ERROR 0x0C
MDSADD_ERROR 0x0D
ILLEGAL_CMD_ERROR 0x10
NOMEMORY_ERROR 0x13
RESETPARAM_ERROR 0x15
RESET_ERROR 0x18
CMDACT_ERROR 0x19
ANTENNE_ERROR 0x1C
MAXMDS_ERROR 0x1D
CMDLEN_ERROR 0x1E
CMDBRK_ERROR 0x1F
INTERNAL_ERROR 0x20
If the function is entered with parameters, the following error message ap-
pears:
Wrong number of parameter!
Usage: e
Table 3-23 Error codes at the SLG interface in direct addressing
Short name Error
code
Meaning
NOMDS_ERROR 0x01 Presence error:
There is no MDS in the field which has the
MDS ID number specified in the command.
Either the MDS has either already exited the
field or the command was supplied with an
incorrect MDS ID number.
TIME_ERROR 0x02 Timeout error:
A pending MDS command was aborted by
an ”antenna off” command.
MDSMEM_ERROR 0x04 Error in the memory of the MDS.
CMD_ERROR 0x05 The command cannot be interpreted by the
SLG. At least one parameter supplied is im-
permissible.
e function
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-126 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 3-23 Error codes at the SLG interface in direct addressing
Short name MeaningError
code
RADIO_ERROR 0x06 The MDS exited the field during communi-
cation.
There was interference in the field during
communication.
MDSERA_ERROR 0x0B The memory of the MDS cannot be read
correctly.
MDSWRT_ERROR 0x0C It is not permissible for the OTP memory to
be rewritten.
MDSADD_ERROR 0x0D The MDS address specified in the command
is impermissible (address error).
ILLEGAL_CMD_ERROR 0x10 The NEXT command is not permissible.
NOMEMORY_ERROR 0x13 The buffer in the SLG is no longer sufficient
for storing the command.
RESETPARAM_ERROR 0x15 At least one parameter was supplied incor-
rectly in the RESET command.
RESET_ERROR 0x18 The SLG must be reset with the RESET
command.
CMDACT_ERROR 0x19 There is already a command pending in the
SLG for communication with an MDS. A
further command is not permissible.
COMM_ERROR 0x1B Communication error at the SLG interface
(3964R driver)
ANTENNE_ERROR 0x1C The antenna is already activated and has re-
ceived another activation command.
The antenna is already deactivated and has
received another deactivation command.
The antenna in the SLG is switched off. An
MDS command was sent to the SLG in this
state. Switch the antenna on beforehand
using the antenna on/off command.
MAXMDS_ERROR 0x1D The number of MDSs in the field is not per-
missible. It is larger than the number set in
the RESET command under bunch.
CMDLEN_ERROR 0x1E The message frame length of the command
is too large or too small. In other words, the
structure of the message frame is incorrect
and consists of an incorrect number of cha-
racters.
CMDBRK_ERROR 0x1F A pending command in the SLG was cance-
led (deleted) by the RESET command.
INTERNAL_ERROR 0x20 An internal SLG error occurred.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-127
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.12 SLG LEDs
The SLG U92 has two light-emitting diodes (LEDs) in green and orange,
which indicate the operating status of the SLG. The possible states of the
LEDs are indicated in the table below.
Table 3-24 LED states depending on the operating status of the SLG U92
State of the LED Operating status of the SLG
Green Orange
Off Off The SLG is not in operation. There is no voltage applied.
Off On The SLG starts up after the power is switched on. Power-up
lasts 3 seconds.
Flashing Off The SLG has not yet been parameterized with the RESET
command via the SLG interface.
The SLG has started up and the RF transmitter is switched
off. It is therefore not possible to identify an MDS. The
flashing frequency is approx. 2 Hz.
The RF transmitter is switched off.
The RF transmitter is switched off by means of the ”an-
tenna off” command. It is therefore not possible to identify
an MDS. The flashing frequency is approx. 2 Hz.
The SLG should be parameterized with an invalid RESET
command via the SLG interface.
The RF transmitter is then switched off. It is therefore not
possible to identify an MDS. The flashing frequency is
approx. 2 Hz.
On Off The SLG is ready for communication.
The SLG is in operation and parameterized. The RF trans-
mitter is switched on, and identification of and commu-
nication with one or more MDSs is possible.
On On Communication with the MDS
Communication is taking place at the radio interface.
Since communication is sometimes very short, the mini-
mum duration for the illumination of the orange LED is
0.1 seconds. Consequently, if there are several short
instances of communication in succession, the LED flashes
accordingly.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-128 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.13 SLG synchronization via cable connection
If two or three SLGs are arranged at a short distance from each other in such
a way that they interfere with each other because of their field strength and at
the same time want to read from an MDS or write to an MDS, there are colli-
sions/interference between the SLGs. Communication is delayed as a result,
to an extent which it is impossible to calculate. The purpose of the synchroni-
zation is that the transmission medium “air” should be available to only one
SLG at a certain time and a defined communication sequence should be esta-
blished.
Synchronization is achieved by interconnecting the SLGs with a cable con-
nection between the service interfaces.
The synchronization procedure is based on a time slot procedure in which
one SLG is always active for one time period (time slice). The access me-
thods and the collision resolution work in a similar way to CSMA/CD with
Ethernet.
Two or three SLGs are synchronized with SLG synchronization via a
cable connection.
If there is simultaneous access by more than one SLG to an MDS, the
collision is resolved and one SLG can commence and execute commu-
nication.
An SLG is active for at least a time slice with the duration
tsyn = 2 x 320 ms (320 ms = default value of sleep time) and is subse-
quently inactive for at least tsyn.
During ongoing communication the SLG remains active, including the
standby time.
The SLG-SYNC and SLG-SYNC-GND connections at the service inter-
face must be interconnected with the connection cable for synchroniza-
tion (see Figure 3-52 and Section 3.10.4).
The last 10 bits of the SLG ID numbers of the SLGs that are to be syn-
chronized must be different.
The number of SLGs to be synchronized (two or three) must be parame-
terized via the service interface of the respective SLG (see Sec-
tion 3.11.3). The default setting is two SLGs.
SLG synchronization can be activated statically via the service interface
(see Section 3.11.3) or dynamically using the reset command (only in nor-
mal mode).
General
Core functions
Prerequisites
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-129
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
1. With the get_version function (see Section 3.11.3) check at the service
interface whether the last 10 bits of the ID numbers of the SLGs that are
to be synchronized are different.
If not, change the respective SLG ID number on the appropriate SLG with
the slgid function (see Section 3.11.3) at the service interface.
Normally the SLG ID numbers are different. The SLG ID number is set in
the factory. As the lower 10 bits of the SLG ID number cover the range of
values from 0 to 1023, this range of ID numbers is always repeated after
1024 devices.
The SLG ID number is used for resolving collisions in the event of a si-
multaneous attempt to access an MDS.
2. Activate synchronization on the SLGs that are to be synchronized with
the set_param function (see Section 3.11.3). 1
The synchronization status that is currently set can be interrogated with
the get_param command (see Section 3.11.3).
3. Connect the SLGs that are to be synchronized via the service interface
with the synchronization cable (see Figure 3-52 and Section 3.10.4).
Service
interface
SLG-SYNC
SLG-SYNC-GND
Service
interface
Service
interface
Figure 3-52 Three SLGs connected for synchronization
1 Only if synchronization is to be activated via the service interface. Otherwise it must be activated using the reset com-
mand.
Commissioning
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-130 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The synchronization procedure is based on a time slot procedure in which
one SLG is always active for one time period. The access methods and the
collision resolution work in a similar way to CSMA/CD with Ethernet.
MDS
SLG 2
SLG 1
Active
“Sleeping”
Communication
Active
Communication
Active
Figure 3-53 Synchronization between two SLGs
The first SLG obtains access for the time slice with the duration
tsyn = 2 x 320 ms, after which it relinquishes access and the second SLG ob-
tains access with the duration tsyn.
This interplay continues until the MDS is recognized as being present by the
currently active SLG in zone 1. The subsequent behavior of the active SLG
(in the further procedure this is referred to as SLG 1) depends on the operat-
ing mode of SLG 1 and the application.
With ”presence” message; no MDS command pending;
without standby time:
SLG 1 reports the presence and waits for the time slice. If no MDS com-
mand arrives for execution within the time slice, SLG 1 enables access.
The second SLG (SLG 2) then obtains access. In the meantime the MDS
puts itself to sleep.
If a command arrives within the time slice, the time slice is reset with the
arrival of the command. When the sleep time of the MDS has expired, the
command is executed. If there is a command chain, the time slice is reset
with each command within the chain.
Synchronization
mode
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-131
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
With ”presence” message; no MDS command pending;
with standby time:
SLG 1 reports the presence and waits for the time slice.
If no MDS command arrives for execution within the time slice, SLG 1
enables access. The second SLG (SLG 2) then obtains access. In the
meantime the MDS puts itself to sleep.
If an MDS command arrives within the time slice and the standby time
has not yet expired, the time slice is reset and the command is immedi-
ately executed. If there is a command chain, the time slice is reset with
each command within the chain.
If an MDS command within the time slice and the standby time has al-
ready expired, SLG 1 resets the time slice and waits for the MDS to be
woken up, at most up until the expiry of the time slice. If the sleep time
of the MDS expires within the time slice, the command is executed im-
mediately. If the sleep time of the MDS does not expire within the time
slice, SLG 1 enables access. The second SLG (SLG 2) then obtains ac-
cess.
With ”presence” message; an MDS command pending;
without standby time:
SLG 1 reports the presence and resets the time slice before the pending
command is executed. It executes the pending command and waits until
the time slice has expired. If no new MDS command arrives for execution
within the time slice, SLG 1 enables access. SLG 2 obtains access. In the
meantime the MDS puts itself to sleep.
If a new MDS command arrives within the time slice, the time slice is
reset. When the sleep time of the MDS has expired, the command is exe-
cuted. If there is a command chain, the time slice is reset with each com-
mand within the chain.
With ”presence” message; an MDS command pending;
with standby time:
SLG 1 reports the presence and resets the time slice before the pending
command is executed. It executes the pending command and waits until
the time slice has expired.
If an MDS command arrives within the time slice and the standby time
has not yet expired, the time slice is reset and the command is immedi-
ately executed. If there is a command chain, the time slice is reset with
each command within the chain.
If an MDS command arrives within the time slice and the standby time
has already expired, SLG 1 resets the time slice and waits for the MDS to
be woken up at most until the time slice has expired. If the sleep time of
the MDS expires within the time slice, the command is executed immedi-
ately. If the sleep time of the MDS does not expire within the time slice,
SLG 1 enables access. The second SLG (SLG 2) then obtains access.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-132 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Without ”presence” message; no MDS command pending;
without standby time:
SLG 1 detects the MDS as being present but does not report it and waits
until the time slice has expired.
If no MDS command arrives for execution within the time slice, SLG 1
enables access. SLG 2 obtains access. In the meantime the MDS puts it-
self to sleep.
If an MDS command arrives within the time slice, the time slice is reset.
When the sleep time of the MDS has expired, the command is executed.
If there is a command chain, the time slice is reset with each command
within the chain.
Without ”presence” message; no MDS command pending;
with standby time:
SLG 1 detects the MDS as being present but does not report it and waits
until the time slice has expired.
If no MDS command arrives for execution within the time slice, SLG 1
enables access. The second SLG (SLG 2) then obtains access. In the
meantime the MDS puts itself to sleep.
If an MDS command arrives within the time slice and the standby time
has not yet expired, the time slice is reset and the command is immedi-
ately executed. If there is a command chain, the time slice is reset with
each command within the chain.
If an MDS command arrives within the time slice and the standby time
has already expired, SLG 1 resets the time slice and waits for the MDS to
be woken up at most until the time slice has expired. If the sleep time of
the MDS expires within the time slice, the command is executed immedi-
ately. If the sleep time of the MDS does not expire within the time slice,
SLG 1 enables access. The second SLG (SLG 2) then obtains access.
Without ”presence” message; an MDS command pending;
without standby time:
SLG 1 detects the MDS as being present but does not report it. Before the
pending command is executed it resets the time slice and executes the
command. If no new MDS command arrives for execution within the time
slice, SLG 1 enables access. SLG 2 obtains access. In the meantime the
MDS puts itself to sleep.
If a new MDS command arrives within the time slice, the time slice is
reset before the command is executed. When the sleep time of the MDS
has expired, the command is executed. If there is a command chain, the
time slice is reset with each command within the chain.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-133
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Without ”presence” message; an MDS command pending;
with standby time:
SLG 1 detects the MDS as being present but does not report it. Before the
pending command is executed it resets the time slice and executes the
command.
If no new MDS command arrives for execution within the time slice,
SLG 1 enables access. SLG 2 obtains access. In the meantime the MDS
puts itself to sleep.
If an MDS command arrives within the time slice and the standby time
has not yet expired, the time slice is reset and the command is immedi-
ately executed. If there is a command chain, the time slice is reset with
each command within the chain.
If an MDS command arrives within the time slice and the standby time
has already expired, SLG 1 resets the time slice and waits for the MDS to
be woken up at most until the time slice has expired. If the sleep time of
the MDS expires within the time slice, the time slice is reset and the com-
mand is executed immediately. If the sleep time of the MDS does not ex-
pire within the time slice, SLG 1 enables access. The second SLG
(SLG 2) then obtains access.
When the second SLG (SLG 2) has access and the MDS for this SLG is not
located in zone 1, SLG 2 relinquishes access after the time slice with the
duration tsyn.
When SLG 2 detects the MDS as being present in zone 1, the subsequent be-
havior of SLG 2 is identical to that of SLG 1.
Synchronization between three SLGs
When there is synchronization between three SLGs, as is the case with syn-
chronization between two SLGs one SLG at a time obtains access for com-
munication for a time slice with the duration tsyn = 2 x 320 ms. The time
slice in the event of communication with an MDS is lengthened (set) in the
same way as for synchronization between two SLGs. After expiry of the ac-
cess time the SLG waits for the period 2 x tsyn (= 4 x 320 ms).
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
3-134 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
3.14 Power reduction
On the SLG U92 without FCC, the transmitting power is < 10 mW. If re-
quired this transmitting power can be reduced by approximately 10 dB.
A reduction may become necessary in the following circumstances:
Waves carried strongly by large metal surfaces in the close vicinity of the
antenna field and hence very slight attenuation of wave propagation
As a result ranges may become very large, and MDSs may therefore be
detected from distances of as much as 20 m or more. Although these
MDSs are not processed, they can delay communication with the MDS in
zone 1.
The power reduction makes the detection area for MDSs smaller.
Two or more SLGs arranged close to each other
These are particularly likely to affect each other (through their antenna
fields) if the waves are routed in the direction of the other SLG virtually
without attenuation due to the presence of metallic surfaces.
Communication is delayed as a result.
Reducing the transmitting power removes or reduces the interference.
Configuration and Installation Guidelines
4-1
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Mobile Data Memories 4
4-2 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
4.1 Introduction
MOBY identification systems ensure that a product is accompanied by mea-
ningful data from the beginning to the end.
First, mobile data memories are affixed to the product or its carrier or its pak-
kaging, then written without contact, changed and read. All information on
production and material flow control is located right on the product. Its ro-
bust construction permits use in rugged environments and makes the MDS
insensitive to many chemical substances.
The primary components of mobile data memories (MDSs) are logic, an an-
tenna, a data memory and a battery.
To keep the MDS’s power consumption low and make localization reproduci-
ble, MOBY U has different function zones based on direction and distance.
The three different zones of the transmission field (see figure 4-1) represent
different states and reactions of the affected components.
SLG U92 with
integrated antenna
MDS
Zone 1: r = max. 3.5 m
can be set
incrementally
Zone 2: r = up to approx. 5 m
Zone 3: r > approx. 5 m or shielded
70°
Direction of
MDS’s move-
ment
Transmission
field
Figure 4-1 Status zones for MDS in transmission field of SLG U92
Application area
Construction and
functions
Mobile Data Memories
4-3
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Zone 3:
In simplified terms, zone 3 is the UHF-free area. The MDS is asleep and
only wakes up to listen for an SLG once every < 0.5 sec. Power consump-
tion is very low. If other UHF users are in the vicinity and they are using
the same frequency range, this does not shorten the battery life of the
MDS since it does not wake up until it receives a special code.
Zone 2:
If the MDS receives this special code in the vicinity of an active SLG, it
enters zone 2 (see Figure 4-1). Starting immediately it accepts the SLG
and responds briefly with its own ID. However, the SLG ignores all
MDSs which are not in zone 1 (radius can be parameterized on the SLG
in increments). Power consumption in zone 2 is a little higher than in
zone 3.
Zone 1:
When an MDS enters zone 1, it is registered by the SLG and can begin
exchanging data. All read and write functions can now be performed. The
power consumption of the MDS increases briefly during communication.
Since transmission through the air is very fast, total communication time
is very short. The entire 32-Kbyte data memory can be read in less than
eight seconds. This means that data communication hardly uses the bat-
tery.
As long as the MDS is located in zone 1, it is ready to exchange data
when requested by the SLG. When no command for the MDS is queued,
it still reports at regular parameterizable intervals with its ID (sleep-time,
similar to t-ABTAST with MOBY I) when requested by the SLG. Its be-
havior then corresponds to that in zone 2, and power consumption drops
again accordingly.
Mobile Data Memories
4-4 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 4-1 Overview of the MDS
MDS
Type
Memory Size Temperature Range
(during Operation)
Dimensions
L x W x H
(in mm)
Degree of
Protection
MDS
U313
2-Kbyte RAM
32-bit fixed code
128-bit read-only
memory
–25 to +70 °C111 x 67 x 23.5 IP 67
MDS
U315
2-Kbyte RAM
32-bit fixed code
128-bit read-only
memory
–25 to +70 °C111 x 67 x 23.5 IP 65
MDS
U524
32-Kbyte RAM
32-bit fixed code
128-bit read-only
memory
–25 to +85 °C111 x 67 x 23.5 IP 68
MDS
U525
32-Kbyte RAM
32-bit fixed code
128-bit read-only
memory
–25 to +85 °C111 x 67 x 23.5 IP 65
MDS
U589
32-Kbyte RAM
32-bit fixed code
128-bit read-only
memory
–25 to +220 °C
(cyclic)
Ø 30 x 10 IP 68
Table 4-2 Operational/ambient conditions of the MDS
MDS U313/
MDS U315
MDS U524/
MDS U525
MDS U589
Mechanical ambient conditions:
The mechanical ambient conditions for data carriers are defined in
EN 60721-3-7 Class 7 M3.
Proof of mechanical stability is
provided by a vibration test in ac-
cordance with EN 60068-2-6,
sinusoidal vibrations:
Test conditions
Frequency range
Amplitude of the displace-
ment
Acceleration
Test duration per axis
Speed of passage
10 Hz to 500 Hz
3.1 mm at 10 Hz to 20 Hz
5 g at 20 Hz to 500 Hz
10 cycles
10 octave/min
Overview
Operational/am-
bient conditions
Mobile Data Memories
4-5
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 4-2 Operational/ambient conditions of the MDS
MDS U589MDS U524/
MDS U525
MDS U313/
MDS U315
Proof of mechanical stability is
provided by a vibration test in ac-
cordance with EN 60068-2-64,
random vibrations:
Test conditions
Frequency range
Acceleration density
Test duration per axis
10 Hz to 650 Hz
0.001 m2/s3 at 10 Hz;
increasing to 0.1 m2/s3 at 60 Hz
constant 0.1 m2/s3 at 60 Hz to 350 Hz
decreasing to 0.001 m2/s3 at 650 Hz
30 min
Proof of mechanical stability is
provided by a continuous shock
test in accordance with
EN 60068-2-29
Test conditions
Acceleration
Duration
Test duration per axis
1000 m/sec2
6 ms
500 shocks per position;
3 axes = 6 positions (+/–X, Y, Z)
Torsion and bending stress Not permitted
Degree of protection in accor-
dance with EN 60529
IP67/IP65 IP68/IP65 IP 68
Operating temperature
checked in accordance with
EN 60068-2-1, -2, and -30
–25 °C to
+70 °C
–25 °C to
+85 °C
–25 °C to
+220 °C
(cyclic)
Non-operating temperature
checked in accordance with
EN 60068-2-1, -2, and -30
–40 °C to +85 °C
Temperature gradient in the non-
operating temperature range
checked in accordance with
EN 60068-2-14 Nb
3 °C/min
Temperature gradient with rapid
temperature changes
checked in accordance with
EN 60068-2-14 Na
Transition from 0 °C to +70 °C (+85 °C) in 10 s;
hold time 30 min;
transition from +70 °C (+85 °C) to 0 °C in 15 s;
100 cycles
Cleaning with water jet –Max. of 5 min
at max. of
2 bar
Chemical resistance See Section 3.3.5
Mobile Data Memories
4-6 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 4-2 Operational/ambient conditions of the MDS
MDS U589MDS U524/
MDS U525
MDS U313/
MDS U315
Certifications RF: EN 300440-2 1
SAR: EN 50371
Safety: EN 60950-1
EMC: EN 301489-01
EN 301489-03
ENV 50204
FCC Part 15C (USA)
CULUS 2
Safe for pacemakers
Definition of IP65
– Protection against penetration of dust (dustproof)
– Total protection against accidental touch
– Protection against stream of water
Definition of IP67
– Protection against penetration of dust (dustproof)
– Total protection against accidental touch
– Protection against water under defined pressure and time conditions
Definition of IP68:
– Protection against penetration of dust (dustproof)
– Total protection against accidental touch
– The MDS can be continuously submerged in water. Ask manufacturer for condi-
tions.
!Warning
The values for vibration and shock are maximum values and must not occur
continuously.
Use in conditions in which the maximum values for vibration and shock may
be exceeded must be checked beforehand with Siemens.
1 The unit can be used in Austria, Belgium, France (only indoor), Germany, Italy, Spain, United Kingdom.
2 In preparation for MDS U315 and MDS U525.
Mobile Data Memories
4-7
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
4.2 MDS U313
The MDS U313 is a mobile data memory (MDS) with a storage capacity of 2
Kbytes for use in transportation and logistics. The particularly low current
consumption guarantees a long life of 5 years. The interference-immune and
robust MDS can be read and written at a maximum distance of 3 m. The
MDS U313 is addressed directly with byte memory accesses. The transmis-
sion frequency in the ISM frequency band of 2.4 GHz makes the MDS’s net
data transmission speed very fast (up to 8 Kbyte/sec without multitag opera-
tion and up to 4 Kbyte/sec with multitag operation of two MDSs).
Figure 4-2 MDS U313
Table 4-3 Ordering data for the MDS U313
Order No.
Mobile data memory MDS U313
With 2 Kbyte RAM
MDS ID number (32 bits)
Read-only memory (128 bits)
6GT2 500-3BD10
Ordering data
Mobile Data Memories
4-8 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 4-4 Technical data of the MDS U313
Fixed code memory MDS ID number (32 bits)
Read-only memory 128 bits, to be written once by user
Application memory
Memory technology
Memory size
Memory organization
RAM
2 Kbytes
Byte access
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2.5 x 106 hours (without taking the
battery into account)
Read/write distance 0.15 m up to 3 m
Depends on direction No
Multitag-capable Yes
Power supply Battery
Battery lifespan w 5 years at 25 °C1;
no replacement
Shock, vibration in accordance with
EN 60721-3-7, class 7 M3
50 g/10 g
Free fall in accordance with EN 60068-2-32 1 m
Mounting 4 M4 screws
Tightening moment (at room temperature) v 0.8 Nm
Recommended distance from metal Can be mounted directly on metal
Degree of protection in accordance with
EN 60529
IP 67
Chemical resistance See Section 3.3.5
Housing
Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm
Color/material
111 x 67 x 23.5
Anthracite/plastic, PA 12 GF 25
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transportation and storage
–25 to +70 °C
–40 to +85 °C
Weight, approx. 100 g
1 The lifespan depends on the temperature, the length of time for which the MDS is in
the SLG’s antenna field (zones 1 and 2), and the amount of data read/written (see Sec-
tion 3.1.5).
!Warning
The mobile data memory contains a lithium battery, which should be han-
dled as follows:
Avoid the risk of fire, explosion and severe burns
The battery must not be heated to temperatures above 100 °C.
Do not dismantle the data memory or mechanically destroy it. The bat-
tery could explode if it is handled by unauthorized personnel, damaged,
or if its contents come into contact with water.
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-9
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 4-5 Field data of the MDS U313
Standard Minimal Maximal
Working distance (Sa) 1400 350 2500
Limit distance (Sg) 2000 500 3000
Transmission window (L) 2400 700 3000
Transmission window (W) 2400 700 3000
Minimum distance of MDS to MDS
with
Bunch > 1
Bunch = 1
Directly adjacent
The minimum distance must be such that only
one MDS can be inside the set distance limit.
The field data applies to read and write accesses to the MDS when the an-
tenna sides of the MDS and SLG are facing each other.
The field data is reduced in the case of the SLG variant with FCC certifica-
tion (see Table 5-3).
Overranging can be actively limited by the SLG (in increments of 0.5 m).
Field data (in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-10 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Area of the metal-free space:
U = 2 * L + 2 * W = n * λ where
λ = 122.45 mm " 1 mm and n w 4
Depth of the metal-free space:
D = m * λ/4 where m w 1
L
W
D
Figure 4-3 Metal-free space, MDS U313
The MDS U313 may be installed flush in metal, countersunk in surfaces or
inserted in supports, for example U or T supports.
The field geometry is only slightly reduced if it is installed flush with the
metal.
Metal-free space is necessary to ensure good communication if the MDS
is countersunk in metal surfaces. The area of the metal-free space should
be a multiple of the wavelength λ = 122.45 mm + 1 mm where n w 4.
We recommend a metal installation box with an area of n * λ where n = 4
and a depth of λ/4. The area and depth relate to the internal dimensions.
The MDS U313 can be positioned anywhere in the box except directly on
the bottom.
The smallest installation box has the following area:
Area = 2 *L [mm] + 2 * W [mm] = 4 * λwhere L = W
= 4 * 122.45 mm = 489.8 mm
It has the following depth:
D = λ/4 = 122.45 mm / 4 = 30.6 mm.
The metal box with an area of 4 * λ and a depth of λ/4 somewhat in-
creases the directional effect of the MDS U313. This means that the range
increases and the field width is reduced by approximately 200 mm.
A greater depth of D = λ/2 reduces the field width by approximately
200mm. A larger area of w 5 * λ reduces the effect of the greater depth.
We recommend you also use the installation box if you use U or T sup-
ports. This ensures that the antenna field is less dependent on the environ-
ment.
Metal-free space
Mobile Data Memories
4-11
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Pertinax, acrylic, or non-polar plastic materials such as polyamide or PPS can
be used for covering the MDS U313, for example as impact protection.
Plastic materials suitable for RF welding absorb the RF field used for com-
munication. They are therefore not suitable.
It is difficult to make a statement about the suitability of wooden covers be-
cause of their moisture content and different impregnations.
Acrylic glass with a thickness of 10 mm reduces the field width by approxi-
mately 100 mm.
MOBY U
MDS U313
Figure 4-4 Dimensions of the MDS U313
Covering materials
Dimensions
(in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-12 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
4.3 MDS U315
The MDS U315 is a mobile data memory (MDS) with a storage capacity of
2 Kbytes and a replaceable battery especially suitable for use in transporta-
tion and logistics. The particularly low current consumption guarantees a
long life of 5 years. The service life of the MDS can be prolonged accord-
ingly by the possibility of replacing the battery. The interference-immune and
robust MDS can be read and written at a maximum distance of 3 m. The
MDS U 315 is addressed directly with byte memory accesses. The transmis-
sion frequency in the ISM frequency band of 2.4 GHz makes the MDS’s net
data transmission speed very fast (up to 8 Kbyte/sec without multitag opera-
tion and up to 4 Kbyte/sec with multitag operation of two MDSs).
Figure 4-5 MDS U315
Table 4-6 Ordering data for the MDS U315
Order No.
Mobile data memory MDS U315
with 2 Kbytes RAM
MDS ID number (32 bits)
Read-only memory (128 bits)
replaceable battery
6GT2 500-3BF10
Ordering data
Mobile Data Memories
4-13
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 4-7 Technical data of the MDS U315
Fixed code memory MDS ID number (32 bits)
Read-only memory 128 bits, to be written once by user
Application memory
Memory technology
Memory size
Memory organization
RAM
2 Kbytes
Byte access
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2.5 x 106 hours (without taking the
battery into account)
Read/write distance 0.15 m up to 3 m
Depends on direction No
Multitag-capable Yes
Power supply Battery
Battery lifespan w 5 years at 25 °C1;
without replacing the battery
w 10 years at 25 °C1;
with replacement of the battery
w can be replaced 5 times
Shock, vibration in accordance with
EN 60721-3-7, class 7 M3
50 g/10 g
Free fall in accordance with EN 60068-2-32 1 m
Mounting 4 M4 screws
Tightening moment (at room temperature) v 0.8 Nm
Battery replacement compartment on the rear; cover
secured with 4 screws
Recommended distance from metal Can be mounted directly on metal
Degree of protection in accordance with EN
60529
IP 65
Chemical resistance See Section 3.3.5
Housing
Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm
Color/material
111 x 67 x 23.5
Anthracite/plastic, PA 12 GF 25
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transportation and storage
–25 to +70 °C
–40 to +85 °C
Weight, approx. 100 g
1 The lifespan depends on the temperature, the length of time for which the MDS is in
the SLG’s antenna field (zones 1 and 2), and the amount of data read/written (see Sec-
tion 3.1.5).
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-14 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
!Warning
The mobile data memory contains a lithium battery, which should be han-
dled as follows:
Avoid the risk of fire, explosion and severe burns
The battery must not be heated to temperatures above 100 °C.
Do not dismantle the data memory or mechanically destroy it. The bat-
tery could explode if it is handled by unauthorized personnel, damaged,
or if its contents come into contact with water.
Table 4-8 Field data of the MDS U315
Standard Minimal Maximal
Working distance (Sa) 1400 350 2500
Limit distance (Sg) 2000 500 3000
Transmission window (L) 2400 700 3000
Transmission window (W) 2400 700 3000
Minimum distance of MDS to MDS
with
Bunch > 1
Bunch = 1
Directly adjacent
The minimum distance must be such that only
one MDS can be inside the set distance limit.
The field data applies to read and write accesses to the MDS when the an-
tenna sides of the MDS and SLG are facing each other.
The field data is reduced in the case of the SLG variant with FCC certifica-
tion (see Table 5-3).
Overranging can be actively limited by the SLG (in increments of 0.5 m).
Field data (in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-15
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Area of the metal-free space:
U = 2 * L + 2 * W = n * λ where
λ = 122.45 mm " 1 mm and n w 4
Depth of the metal-free space:
D = m * λ/4 where m w 1
L
W
D
Figure 4-6 Metal-free space, MDS U315
The MDS U315 may be installed flush in metal, countersunk in surfaces or
inserted in supports, for example U or T supports.
The field geometry is only slightly reduced if it is installed flush with the
metal.
Metal-free space is necessary to ensure good communication if the MDS
is countersunk in metal surfaces. The area of the metal-free space should
be a multiple of the wavelength λ = 122.45 mm "1 mm where n w 4.
We recommend a metal installation box with an area of n * λ where n = 4
and a depth of λ/4. The area and depth relate to the internal dimensions.
The MDS U 315 can be positioned anywhere in the box except directly on
the bottom.
The smallest installation box has the following area:
Area = 2 *L [mm] + 2 * W [mm] = 4 * λwhere L = W
= 4 * 122.45 mm = 489.8 mm
It has the following depth:
D = λ/4 = 122.45 mm / 4 = 30.6 mm.
The metal box with an area of 4 * λ and a depth of λ/4 somewhat in-
creases the directional effect of the MDS U315. This means that the range
increases and the field width is reduced by approximately 200 mm.
A greater depth of D = λ/2 reduces the field width by approximately
200 mm. A larger area of w 5 * λ reduces the effect of the greater depth.
We recommend you also use the installation box if you use U or T sup-
ports. This ensures that the antenna field is less dependent on the environ-
ment.
Metal-free space
Mobile Data Memories
4-16 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Pertinax, acrylic, or non-polar plastic materials such as polyamide or PPS can
be used for covering the MDS U315, for example as impact protection.
Plastic materials suitable for RF welding absorb the RF field used for com-
munication. They are therefore not suitable.
It is difficult to make a statement about the suitability of wooden covers be-
cause of their moisture content and different impregnations.
Acrylic glass with a thickness of 10 mm reduces the field width by approxi-
mately 100 mm.
MOBY U
MDS U315MDS U315
7CD908C0
Figure 4-7 Dimensions of the MDS U315
Covering materials
Dimensions
(in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-17
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
4.4 MDS U524
The MDS U524 is a mobile data memory (MDS) with a large, 32-Kbyte stor-
age capacity for use in the automotive industry and other industrial produc-
tion plants with similar requirements. The particularly low current consump-
tion guarantees a long life of 8 years. The interference-immune and robust
MDS can be read and written at a maximum distance of 3 m. Addressing the
MDS U524 is easy with the filehandler (from MOBY I) which uses logical
file addresses. In addition, the MDS can also be used with direct memory
accessing. The transmission frequency in the ISM frequency band of 2.4 GHz
makes the MDS’s net data transmission speed very fast (up to 8 Kbyte/sec
without multitag operation and up to 4 Kbyte/sec with multitag operation of
two MDSs).
Figure 4-8 MDS U524
Table 4-9 Ordering data of the MDS 524
Order No.
Mobile data memory MDS U524
with 32-Kbyte RAM
MDS ID number (32 bits)
Read-only memory (128 bits)
6GT2 500-5CE10
Ordering data
Mobile Data Memories
4-18 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 4-10 Technical data of the MDS U524
Fixed code memory MDS ID number (32 bits)
Read-only memory 128 bits, to be written once by user
Application memory
Memory technology
Memory size
Memory organization
RAM
32 Kbytes
Byte access Filehandler mode
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2.5 x 106 hours (without taking the
battery into account)
Read/write distance 0.15 m up to 3 m
Depends on direction No
Multitag-capable Yes
Power supply Battery
Battery lifespan w 8 years at +25 °C1;
no replacement
Shock, vibration in accordance with
EN 60721-3-7, class 7 M3
50 g/10 g
Free fall in accordance with EN 60068-2-32 1 m
Mounting 4 M4 screws
Tightening moment (at room temperature) v 0.8 Nm
Recommended distance from metal Can be mounted directly on metal
Degree of protection in accordance with EN
60529
IP 68
Chemical resistance See Section 3.3.5
Housing
Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm
Color/material
111 x 67 x 23.5
Anthracite/plastic, PA 12 GF 25
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transportation and storage
–25 to +85 °C
–40 to +85 °C
Weight, approx. 100 g
1 The lifespan depends on the temperature, the length of time for which the MDS is in
the SLG’s antenna field (zones 1 and 2), and the amount of data read/written (see Sec-
tion 3.1.5).
!Warning
The mobile data memory contains a lithium battery, which should be han-
dled as follows:
Avoid the risk of fire, explosion and severe burns
The battery must not be heated to temperatures above 100 °C.
Do not dismantle the data memory or mechanically destroy it. The bat-
tery could explode if it is handled by unauthorized personnel, damaged,
or if its contents come into contact with water.
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-19
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 4-11 Field data of the MDS U524
Standard Minimal Maximal
Working distance (Sa) 1400 350 2500
Limit distance (Sg) 2000 500 3000
Transmission window (L) 2400 700 3000
Transmission window (W) 2400 700 3000
Minimum distance of MDS to MDS
with
Bunch > 1
Bunch = 1
Directly adjacent
The minimum distance must be such that only
one MDS can be inside the set distance limit.
The field data applies to read and write accesses to the MDS when the an-
tenna sides of the MDS and SLG are facing each other.
The field data is reduced in the case of the SLG variant with FCC certifica-
tion (see Table 5-3).
Overranging can be actively limited by the SLG (in increments of 0.5 m).
Field data (in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-20 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Area of the metal-free space:
U = 2 * L + 2 * W = n * λ where
λ = 122.45 mm " 1 mm and n w 4
Depth of the metal-free space:
D = m * λ/4 where m w 1
L
W
D
Figure 4-9 Metal-free space, MDS U524
The MDS U524 may be installed flush in metal, countersunk in surfaces or
inserted in supports, for example U or T supports.
The field geometry is only slightly reduced if it is installed flush with the
metal.
Metal-free space is necessary to ensure good communication if the MDS
is countersunk in metal surfaces. The area of the metal-free space should
be a multiple of the wavelength λ = 122.45 mm + 1 mm where n w 4.
We recommend a metal installation box with an area of n * λ where n = 4
and a depth of λ/4. The area and depth relate to the internal dimensions.
The MDS U524 can be positioned anywhere in the box except directly on
the bottom.
The smallest installation box has the following area:
Area = 2 *L [mm] + 2 * W [mm] = 4 * λwhere L = W
= 4 * 122.45 mm = 489.8 mm
It has the following depth:
D = λ/4 = 122.45 mm / 4 = 30.6 mm.
The metal box with an area of 4 * λ and a depth of λ/4 somewhat in-
creases the directional effect of the MDS U524. This means that the range
increases and the field width is reduced by approximately 200 mm.
A greater depth of D = λ/2 reduces the field width by approximately
200 mm. A larger area of w 5 * λ reduces the effect of the greater depth.
We recommend you also use the installation box if you use U or T sup-
ports. This ensures that the antenna field is less dependent on the environ-
ment.
Metal-free space
Mobile Data Memories
4-21
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Pertinax, acrylic, or non-polar plastic materials such as polyamide or PPS can
be used for covering the MDS U524, for example as impact protection.
Plastic materials suitable for RF welding absorb the RF field required for
communication. They are therefore not suitable.
It is difficult to make a statement about the suitability of wooden covers be-
cause of their moisture content and different impregnations.
Acrylic glass with a thickness of 10 mm reduces the field width by approxi-
mately 100 mm.
MOBY U
MDS U524
Figure 4-10 Dimensions of MDS U524
Covering materials
Dimensions
(in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-22 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
4.5 MDS U525
The MDS U 525 is a mobile data memory (MDS) with a large, 32 -Kbyte
storage capacity and a replaceable battery for use in the automotive industry
and other industrial production plants with similar requirements. The particu-
larly low current consumption guarantees a long life of 8 years. The service
life of the MDS can be prolonged accordingly by the possibility of replacing
the battery. The interference-immune and robust MDS can be read and writ-
ten at a maximum distance of 3 m. Addressing the MDS U525 is easy with
the filehandler (from MOBY I) which uses logical file addresses. In addition,
the MDS can also be used with direct memory accessing. The transmission
frequency in the ISM frequency band of 2.4 GHz makes the MDS’s net data
transmission speed very fast (up to 8 Kbyte/sec without multitag operation
and up to 4 Kbyte/sec with multitag operation of two MDSs).
Figure 4-11 MDS U525
Table 4-12 Ordering data for the MDS U525
Order No.
Mobile data memory MDS U525
with 32 Kbytes RAM
MDS ID number (32 bits)
Read-only memory (128 bits)
replaceable battery
6GT2 500-5CF10
Ordering data
Mobile Data Memories
4-23
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 4-13 Technical data of the MDS U525
Fixed code memory MDS ID number (32 bits)
Read-only memory 128 bits, to be written once by user
Application memory
Memory technology
Memory size
Memory organization
RAM
32 Kbytes
Byte access Filehandler mode
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2.5 x 106 hours (without taking the
battery into account)
Read/write distance 0.15 m up to 3 m
Depends on direction No
Multitag-capable Yes
Power supply Battery
Battery lifespan w 8 years at +25 °C1;
without replacing the battery
w 10 years at 25 °C1;
with replacement of the battery
w can be replaced 5 times
Shock, vibration in accordance with
EN 60721-3-7, class 7 M3
50 g/10 g
Free fall in accordance with EN 60068-2-32 1 m
Mounting 4 M4 screws
Tightening moment (at room temperature) v 0.8 Nm
Battery replacement compartment on the rear; cover
secured with 4 screws
Recommended distance from metal Can be mounted directly on metal
Degree of protection in accordance with EN
60529
IP 65
Chemical resistance See Section 3.3.5
Housing
Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm
Color/material
111 x 67 x 23.5
Anthracite/plastic, PA 12 GF 25
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transportation and storage
–25 to +85 °C
–40 to +85 °C
Weight, approx. 100 g
1 The lifespan depends on the temperature, the length of time for which the MDS is in
the SLG’s antenna field (zones 1 and 2), and the amount of data read/written (see Sec-
tion 3.1.5).
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-24 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
!Warning
The mobile data memory contains a lithium battery, which should be han-
dled as follows:
Avoid the risk of fire, explosion and severe burns
The battery must not be heated to temperatures above 100 °C.
Do not dismantle the data memory or mechanically destroy it. The bat-
tery could explode if it is handled by unauthorized personnel, damaged,
or if its contents come into contact with water.
Table 4-14 Field data of the MDS U525
Standard Minimal Maximal
Working distance (Sa) 1400 350 2500
Limit distance (Sg) 2000 500 3000
Transmission window (L) 2400 700 3000
Transmission window (W) 2400 700 3000
Minimum distance of MDS to MDS
with
Bunch > 1
Bunch = 1
Directly adjacent
The minimum distance must be such that only
one MDS can be inside the set distance limit.
The field data applies to read and write accesses to the MDS when the an-
tenna sides of the MDS and SLG are facing each other.
The field data is reduced in the case of the SLG variant with FCC certifica-
tion (see Table 5-3).
Overranging can be actively limited by the SLG (in increments of 0.5 m).
Field data (in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-25
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Area of the metal-free space:
U = 2 * L + 2 * W = n * λ where
λ = 122.45 mm " 1 mm and n w 4
Depth of the metal-free space:
D = m * λ/4 where m w 1
L
W
D
Figure 4-12 Metal-free space, MDS U525
The MDS U525 may be installed flush in metal, countersunk in surfaces or
inserted in supports, for example U or T supports.
The field geometry is only slightly reduced if it is installed flush with the
metal.
Metal-free space is necessary to ensure good communication if the MDS
is countersunk in metal surfaces. The area of the metal-free space should
be a multiple of the wavelength λ = 122.45 mm " 1 mm where n w 4.
We recommend a metal installation box with an area of n * λ where n = 4
and a depth of λ/4. The area and depth relate to the internal dimensions.
The MDS U 525 can be positioned anywhere in the box except directly on
the bottom.
The smallest installation box has the following area:
Area = 2 *L [mm] + 2 * W [mm] = 4 * λwhere L = W
= 4 * 122.45 mm = 489.8 mm
It has the following depth:
D = λ/4 = 122.45 mm / 4 = 30.6 mm.
The metal box with an area of 4 * λ and a depth of λ/4 somewhat in-
creases the directional effect of the MDS U525. This means that the range
increases and the field width is reduced by approximately 200 mm.
A greater depth of D = λ/2 reduces the field width by approximately
200 mm. A larger area of w 5 * λ reduces the effect of the greater depth.
We recommend you also use the installation box if you use U or T sup-
ports. This ensures that the antenna field is less dependent on the environ-
ment.
Metal-free space
Mobile Data Memories
4-26 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Pertinax, acrylic, or non-polar plastic materials such as polyamide or PPS can
be used for covering the MDS U525, for example as impact protection.
Plastic materials suitable for RF welding absorb the RF field required for
communication. They are therefore not suitable.
It is difficult to make a statement about the suitability of wooden covers be-
cause of their moisture content and different impregnations.
Acrylic glass with a thickness of 10 mm reduces the field width by approxi-
mately 100 mm.
MOBY U
MDS U525
81C908C1
Figure 4-13 Dimensions of MDS U525
Covering materials
Dimensions
(in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-27
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
4.6 MDS U589
The MDS U589 is a mobile data memory (MDS) with a large, 32-Kbyte stor-
age capacity. It is designed for use at high temperature ranges (up to +220°C,
cyclically), especially in the paint shops of the automotive industry. The size
of the MDS permits it to be attached to a skid or directly to a chassis.
The particularly low current consumption guarantees a long life of 5 years.
The interference-immune and robust MDS can be read and written at a maxi-
mum distance of 3 m. Addressing the MDS U589 is easy with the filehandler
(from MOBY I) which uses logical file addresses. In addition, the MDS can
also be used with direct memory accessing. The transmission frequency in
the ISM frequency band of 2.4 GHz makes the MDS’s net data transmission
speed very fast (up to 8 Kbyte/sec without multitag operation and
4 Kbyte/sec with multitag operation of two MDSs).
Some typical applications are listed below.
Basic coat, KTL area, cataphoresis with drying chambers
Covering coat
Washing area
Other applications with high temperatures
Figure 4-14 MDS U589
Table 4-15 Ordering data of the MDS U589
Order No.
Mobile data memory MDS U589
with 32-Kbyte RAM
MDS ID number (32 bits)
Read-only memory (128 bits)
6GT2 500-5JK10
Accessory:
holder
Universal holder for MDS U589
Short model for MDS 439E/U589
Long model for MDS 439E/U589
Covering hood for MDS 439E/U589
6GT2 590-0QA00
6GT2 090-0QA00
6GT2 090-0QA00-ZA31
6GT2 090-0QB00
Ordering data
Mobile Data Memories
4-28 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 4-16 Technical data of the MDS U589
Fixed code memory MDS ID number (32 bits)
Read-only memory 128 bits, to be written once by user
Application memory
Memory technology
Memory size
Memory organization
RAM
32 Kbytes
Byte access; Filehandler mode
MTBF (at +40 °C) 2.5 x 106 hours (without taking the
battery into account)
Read/write distance 0.15 m up to 3 m
Depends on direction No
Multitag-capable Yes
Power supply Battery
Battery lifespan w 5 years at +25 °C 1;
no replacement
Shock, vibration in accordance with
EN 60721-3-7, class 7 M3
50 g/5 g 2
Free fall in accordance with EN 60068-2-32 1 m
Mounting With holder
Recommended distance from metal Can be mounted directly on metal
Degree of protection in accordance with EN
60529
IP 68
Chemical resistance See table 4-2
Housing
Dimensions (Ø x H) in mm
Color/material
114 x 83
Brown/PPS
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transportation and storage
–25 to +85 °C,
up to +220 °C (cyclic)
–40 to +85 °C
Weight, approx. 600 g
1 The lifespan depends on the temperature, the length of time for which the MDS is in
the SLG’s antenna field (zones 1 and 2), and the amount of data read/written (see Sec-
tion 3.1.5).
2 Only applies to original holder
Note
The MDS U589 is silicon-free.
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-29
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 4-17 Field data of the MDS U589
Standard Minimal Maximal
Working distance (Sa) 1400 350 2500
Limit distance (Sg) 2000 500 3000
Transmission window (L) 2400 700 3000
Transmission window (W) 2400 700 3000
Minimum distance of MDS to MDS
with
Bunch > 1
Bunch = 1
Directly adjacent
The minimum distance must be such that only
one MDS can be inside the set distance limit.
The field data applies to read and write accesses to the MDS when the an-
tenna sides of the MDS and SLG are facing each other.
The field data is reduced in the case of the SLG variant with FCC certifica-
tion (see Table 5-3).
Overranging can be actively limited by the SLG (in increments of 0.5 m).
At ambient temperatures of between 85 °C and 200 °C (briefly 220 °C), you
must ensure that the internal temperature of the MDS does not exceed the
critical threshold of 110 °C. Every heating up phase must be followed by a
cooling off phase. The following tables lists several cycles of the MDS U589
at its utmost limits.
Table 4-18 Cycles of the MDS U589 at its utmost limits
Tu (Heating Up) Heating Up Tu (Cooling Off) Cooling Off
220 °C Brief 25 °C> 30 min
200 °C1 h 25 °C> 4 h
200 °C0.5 hr 25 °C> 1 h
180 °C1 h 25 °C> 3 h
Note
Siemens will calculate a temperature profile on request.
Accurate knowledge of the internal temperature makes configuration easier
for time-critical applications.
Note
Ambient temperatures > 220 5C:
If the heat-resistant data memory is subjected to ambient temperatures
> 220 °C, any warranty claims are forfeited.
Mechanical stability is maintained, however, up to 230 °C.
Field data (in mm)
Cyclic operation of
the MDS U589 at
temperatures of
> 85 5C
Mobile Data Memories
4-30 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Note
Internal temperature > 110 5C:
If the heat-resistant data memory is operated at an internal temperature of
> 110 °C, any warranty claims are forfeited. At an internal temperature of
> 110 °C, the heat-resistant data memory loses the ability to function. Com-
munication with the MDS might be impaired for a long time or may no lon-
ger be possible. It is not possible to remedy the fault.
!Warning
The temperatures and temperature cycles specified in this description
must not be exceeded.
Non-compliance with the above may result in death, severe injury, or
major damage to property.
If the internal temperature of 130 °C is exceeded, the integrated lithium
battery in the data memory explodes.
As of 230 °C the mechanical stability of the heat-resistant data memory
is destroyed. Note the mechanical deformation and its effect on the pro-
duction process.
If the data memory is mechanically destroyed (for example as a result of
improper cleaning), it is liable to explode due to the ingress of liquid and
heating.
1 The factor n is determined by the holder of the MDS U589.
Area of the metal-free space:
U = 2 * L + 2 * W = n * λ where
λ = 122.45 mm " 1 mm and n w 7 1
Depth of the metal-free space:
D = m * λ/4 where m w 3
L
W
D
Figure 4-15 Metal-free space, MDS U589
Metal-free space
Mobile Data Memories
4-31
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The MDS U589 may be installed flush in metal, countersunk in surfaces or
inserted in supports, for example U or T supports.
The field geometry is only slightly reduced if it is installed flush with the
metal.
Metal-free space is necessary to ensure good communication if the MDS
is countersunk in metal surfaces. The area of the metal-free space should
be a multiple of the wavelength λ = 122.45 mm + 1 mm where n > 7. We
recommend a metal installation box with an area of n * λ where n = 7 and
a depth of m * λ/4 where m = 3. The area and depth relate to the internal
dimensions. The MDS U589 can be positioned anywhere in the box ex-
cept directly on the bottom.
The smallest installation box has the following area:
Area = 2 *L [mm] + 2 * W [mm] = 7 * λwhere L = 2 * λ; W = 1.5 * λ
= 7* 122.45 mm = 857.15 mm
It has the following depth:
D = m * λ/4 = 3 * 122.45 mm / 4 = 91.8 mm
The metal box with an area of 7 * λ and a depth of 3 * λ/4 somewhat in-
creases the directional effect of the MDS U589. This means that the range
increases and the field width is reduced by approximately 200 mm.
A greater depth of D = λ/2 reduces the field width by approximately 200
mm. A larger area of > 5 * λ reduces the effect of the greater depth.
We recommend you also use the installation box if you use U or T sup-
ports. This ensures that the antenna field is less dependent on the environ-
ment.
Pertinax, acrylic, or non-polar plastic materials such as polyamide or PPS can
be used for covering the MDS U589, for example as impact protection.
Plastic materials suitable for RF welding absorb the RF field required for
communication. They are therefore not suitable.
It is difficult to make a statement about the suitability of wooden covers be-
cause of their moisture content and different impregnations.
Acrylic glass with a thickness of 10 mm reduces the field width by approxi-
mately 100 mm.
Covering materials
Mobile Data Memories
4-32 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
11
Mounting edge
7
11
114 ± 0.5
83 + 3
61
Antenna side
+ 1
+ 1
+ 1
Figure 4-16 Dimensions of the MDS U589
Universal holder
A universal holder is available for when the heat-resistant and robust mobile
data memory MDS U589 is used in paint shops (automotive industry, base/
top coat) or applications with similar temperature requirements, for example
for mounting on a vehicle body. The universal holder weighs about
250 grams.
The universal holder consists of a metal ring and a metal clip. The
MDS U589 must be inserted in the metal ring and then clamped in place with
the clip by screwing the clip tight with just one M6 screw.
The entire holder with the MDS is secured with two M8 screws (either di-
rectly or with the aid of a customer-specific adapter, e.g. on the vehicle
body). The two screws required to attach the universal holder are not in-
cluded with the product.
Figure 4-17 Universal holder with heat-resistant data carrier MDS U589
Dimensions
(in mm)
Holders
Mobile Data Memories
4-33
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Material: V2A sheet metal, 2.5 mm thick
Material 1.4301
136.5
52.5 52.5
55
M8 DIN 929
167
140.5 20
M6 DIN 929
d 129.5
d 115
4
8
R5 12x
31
28
41
16.5
36
2.5 2.5
Figure 4-18 Dimensions: universal holder for heat-resistant data carrier MDS U589
Short model / long model
A special holder made of V2A sheet metal was developed for mounting the
MDS U589 with vibration damping. The construction of the holder ensures
that the MDS is not damaged in the event of a shock or vibration below the
maximum values. Mechanical tolerances for the thermal expansion of the
MDS U589 and the holder are also included.
96
25
11
234
140 100
137
25
7
275
140 100
244
5
3.5
Short type (6GT2 090-0QA00) Long type (6GT2 090-0QA00-ZA31)
Material: V2A sheet metal, 2.5 mm thick
Sheet metal 2.5 59382 1.4541
Figure 4-19 Dimensions: MDS U589 data memory holder
Mobile Data Memories
4-34 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Antenna side
of the MDS
Cover, optional
(6GT2 090-0QB00)
27
51.5
Figure 4-20 Assembling the MDS U589 and holder
The holder is delivered with all the parts required for mounting and a draw-
ing. The screws required to attach the holder are not included with the prod-
uct. The diameter of the fixing screws is M 10, and the minimum length
25 mm. The optional cover can be used for both the long and the short type
of holder.
We recommend a protective cover for the high-temperature data carrier for
use in paint shops. You can obtain further information from your Siemens
branch.
Note
We urgently recommend you to use the MDS U589 only with the original
holder described above. Only this holder ensures that the MDS adheres to
the specified values for shock, vibration, and temperature.
We recommend a protective cover for applications in paint shops.
Mobile Data Memories
5-1
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Read/Write Devices 5
5-2 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
5.1 SLG U92
The MOBY U identification system was designed especially for applications
in automotive production, logistics and similar where high demands are pla-
ced on interference immunity, long read/write distances with moving data
memories, quick and reliable data transmission, easy installation, and reliable
function even in rugged environments. It uses the ISM frequency band of
2.4 GHz (globally approved). Its emission strength is way below the values
recommended by well-known health authorities from all over the world.
MOBY U covers the transmission range up to three meters and thus fulfills
the prerequisites for an end-to-end identification solution. The SLG is avail-
able for every situation with 2 interface versions.
The main areas of application for MOBY U are listed below.
Main assembly lines of the automotive industry (raw product manufactur-
ing, surface treatment and assembly)
Vehicle identification/entry check for moving companies, vehicle parks,
and so on
Container/pallet identification for transportation logistics and distribution
Traffic control technology
Assembly lines
The SLG U92 handles the commands received from the interface or PC/PLC.
The commands with the data to be read or written are converted into appro-
priate communication commands via the RF interface between SLG and
MDS.
The amount of data that can be transferred between SLG and MDS depends
on the following factors.
The speed at which the MDS moves through the SLG’s transmission win-
dow
The length of the transmission window
The number of MDSs in the transmission window (bunch/multitag)
The time during which the MDS is ready for communication (depends on
sleep time and standby time)
The SLG U92 is available in two hardware versions for connection to differ-
ent systems.
System interface with RS 232
for serial connection to any system
(PC/PLC/communications processors)
System interface with RS 422
for serial connection to MOBY interfaces (ASM 475, ASM 473,
ASM 452) for integration in SIMATIC S7 or PROFIBUS or any system
(PC/PLC/communications processors)
Application area
Setup and func-
tions
Read/Write Devices
5-3
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Except for the system interface, the hardware and firmware of both hardware
versions are identical.
Software tools such as SIMATIC S7 functions (FC 45/FC 46/FC 56) and the
MOBY API library for applications under Windows 98/NT/2000 make imple-
mentation in specific applications easy.
The integrated file management system (compatible with the familiar
MOBY I filehandler and supplemented with multitag commands) ensures
simple, convenient administration of data on the mobile data memories.
The SLG U92 works with a transmission frequency in the ISM frequency
band between 2.4 and 2.4835 GHz. This makes a transmission distance of up
to three meters possible with very low transmitter power of < 10 mW EIRP
and high net transmission rates of up to 8 Kbyte/sec. In the case of the
SLG U92 with FCC (see Table 5-1), the transmitting power is < 50 mV/m at
a distance of 3 m. By selection of the transmission frequency, use of robust
modulation procedures and appropriate check routines, sources of electro-
magnetic interference can be disregarded and you are still assured of correct
data transmission and integrity. MOBY U technology eliminates familiar in-
terference during UHF transmissions such as reflection, interference and
overranging. Specially designed antennas ensure a homogenous transmission
field in which mobile data memories (MDSs) are always (100%) detected.
This means expensive shielding and antenna directing can be omitted.
The antenna field of the SLG can be activated and deactivated for commu-
nication with an MDS with a function call or automatically by triggering a
digital input.
There are two ways to manage the data on the mobile data memory:
Bytewise addressing via absolute addresses (start address, length)
Using a convenient file management system (compatible with the
MOBY I filehandler)
When the filehandler is used, the MOBY U read/write device always fetches
its file management information directly from the MDS.
The SLG U92 can be run at three levels.
1. MOBY U can be used for existing system solutions with MOBY I with
default settings, unchanged filehandler functions but without the MOVE
and LOAD commands which used to be required.
2. Only a few extra commands are required for changes in the default set-
tings and requesting diagnostic data.
3. Utilization of all features including multitag processing. At this level, the
commands and/or user data can also be clearly related to the MDS num-
ber.
Two LEDs show the current status (e.g., communication) and make commis-
sioning easier.
Read/Write Devices
5-4 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
A separate service and diagnostic interface (RS 232) is available for easy
commissioning and diagnosis later during regular operation. In addition, the
service function ”load software to SLG” can be used to load future function
expansions via this interface without having to exchange the SLG in existing
applications.
Figure 5-1 Read/write device SLG U92
SLG U92 write/read devices are available in versions with or without
FCC certification.
They vary in transmitting power and thus in field geometry.
The FCC version has a narrow field width (see Figures 5-2 and 5-3).
Table 5-1 Ordering data of the SLG U92
SLG U92 write/read device with RS 422 without FCC 6GT2 501-0CA00
SLG U92 write/read device with RS 232 without FCC 6GT2 501-1CA00
SLG U92 write/read device with RS 422 with FCC 6GT2 501-0BA00
SLG U92 write/read device with RS 232 with FCC 6GT2 501-1BA00
Ordering data
Read/Write Devices
5-5
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 5-2 Technical data of the SLG U92
Air interface
Transmission frequency 2.4 to 2.4835 GHz
Band width 2 x 1 MHz within 83 MHz
Gross bit rate of radio channel 384 kbit/sec
Data transmission speed (net) Without bunch With bunch size 2
Write
Read
8.0 Kbyte/sec
4.8 Kbyte/sec
Approx.
4.0 Kbyte/sec
Approx.
2.4 Kbyte/sec
Distance (read/write) 0.15 m up to 3 m
Limit distance (Sg)
Maximum
Minimum
Default
Adjustable by means of the distance limit
3.0 m
0.5 m
1.5 m
Location resolution Range limitation, adjustable in 0.5 m incre-
ments
Working distance (Sa)Approx. 75% of limit distance Sg
Field length/width with Sg = 1.5 m 3 m
Read/write device (SLG)
Functions MOBY filehandler
Direct read/write access
Multi-identification capability Up to 12 MDSs
MDS recording time u 2 s with 12 MDSs
Object speed t 2 m/s at La = 1.5 m and v 2.5 Kbytes
of data read/written
Power supply 24 VDC (nominal value), 20 VDC to 30 VDC
Current source with limited output power in
accordance with EN 60950/IEC 60950
Current consumption (send) t 300 mA
Operating modes (SLG) Standby
Search
Communication
Synchronization, SLG - SLG By semaphore control via 2nd interface; max.
of 3 SLGs together
Minimum distance between two
SLGs u 6 m
Directly adjacent with synchronization
SLG - SLG
ASM/PC Interface 6-pin SLG connector in accordance with
EN 175201-804
RS 232 or RS 422 (SLG U92 version)
Transmission speed
Transmission protocol
Line length, SLG - ASM
Line length, SLG - PC
Automatic baud rate recognition, 19.2 to
115.2 kbps (depends on ASM/PC and/or line
length)
3964 R
Maximum 1000 m (RS 422; shielded)
Maximum 30 m (RS 232; shielded)
Technical data
Read/Write Devices
5-6 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 5-2 Technical data of the SLG U92
Service interface 11-pin connector in accordance with
EN 175201-804
Interface for service
Transmission rate
Length of cable SLG - PC
Transmission log
2 DIs for BERO
DI 1/DI 2
DI 1 (or DE 2)
Line length, SLG - BERO
Interface for SLG synchronization
Line length, SLG - SLG
RS 232
19.2 kbaud
Maximum 20 m (shielded)
Terminal, ASCII characters
BERO for triggering antenna field on/off
BERO for continuous antenna field on
Maximum 50 m (shielded)
Maximum 30 m (shielded)
LEDs 2 LEDs
Housing
Dimensions [L x W x H]
Color
Material
290 x 135 x 42 without connector
Anthracite
Plastic, PA 12 GF 25
Mounting 4 M6 screws
Tightening moment (at room tempe-
rature) v 2 Nm
Shock, vibration in accordance with
EN 60721-3-7, class 7 M3
30 g/1.5 g
Free fall in accordance with
EN 60068-2-32
1 m
MTBF (at +40°C) 0.4 x 106 hours
Degree of protection in accordance
with EN 60529
IP 65
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
–25 to +70 °C
–40 to +85 °C
Weight, approx. 800 g
Antenna Integrated in the SLG
Emission
Emission density
< 10 mW EIRP 1
< 0.5 µW/cm2 (at distance of 1 m)
Receiver sensitivity –95 dBm
Gain 5 dBi
Radiation backwards –20 dB forwards/backwards ratio
Angle of opening Approx. 70 ° horizontal/vertical
Read/Write Devices
5-7
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 5-2 Technical data of the SLG U92
Polarization Circular
Certifications RF: EN 300440-2 2
SAR: EN 50371
Safety: EN 60950-1
EMC: EN 301489-01
EN 301489-03
ENV 50204
FCC Part 15C (USA) 3
CULUS
Safe for pacemakers
1 The transmitting power of the SLG U92 version with FCC is < 50 mV/m at a distance
of 3 m.
2 The unit can be used in Austria, Belgium, France (only indoor), Germany, Italy, Spain,
United Kingdom.
3 FCC certification only for the SLG U92 version with FCC (see Table 5-1).
!Warning
The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not be
reached on a continuous basis.
The field data are the same regardless of MDS type.
Table 5-3 Field data for SLG U92
Without FCC certifi-
cation
With FCC certifica-
tion
Working distance (Sa)1.5 m up to 2.5 m
Limit distance (Sg)3 m
Transmission window L 3.0 m 2.1 m
Minimum distance D from SLG to
SLG
6 m
Transmitting power must be reduced for FCC certification. A reduction re-
sults in a smaller field size. The limit distance remains at 3 m, but the field
width is reduced to 2.1 m.
Field data
Read/Write Devices
5-8 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY U SLG U92 with RS 422
FCC ID: NXWMOBYU-SLGU92-0
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE rules: operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause undesired operation.
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY U SLG U92 with RS 232
FCC ID: NXWMOBYU-SLGU92-1
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE rules: operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note
Changes or modifications of this unit may void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
The unit is to be supplied by a listed power supply complying C1.2.5 of
UL 60950 (NEC Class 2) and rated from 20 VDC to 30 VDC, min. 300mA.
The unit shall be instored in accordance to the NEC, Article 725-52.
FCC information
UL Information
Read/Write Devices
5-9
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
–3.5 –3.0 –2.5 –2.0 –1.5 –1.0 –0.5 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
[m]
[m]
Sa = 2.5 m
Sg = 3.0 m
L = 3.0 m
SLG
Figure 5-2 Transmission window of the SLG U92 (without FCC)
The transmission window shown above is obtained when the antenna sides of
the MDS and SLG are facing each other.
The field edges are indicated by lines. From above the field is almost round.
The field size can fluctuate slightly due to external influences.
In the inner area the quality of communication can be considered very good
to good. The average communication time between the SLG and MDS can
vary by ±10 % in this area. The MDS can be moved as required in the inner
area of the transmission window with the communication quality remaining
constant, provided that the assignment (angle) of the SLG and MDS remains
unchanged.
The outer area represents the maximum communication area. Between the
inner and outer area the quality of communication decreases towards the out-
side and ends as soon as it exits the area. This means that in extreme cases
the communication time can be a multiple of the original value.
In the direction of radiation from the SLG antenna the communication area is
limited by the range limit.
In applications outside the inner area, an appropriate test should be per-
formed in order to ensure that the quality of communication is still adequate
and that the communication time remains within the required bounds.
Transmission
window (SLG U92
without FCC)
Read/Write Devices
5-10 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The size of the field can be changed by setting the range limit from 0.5 m to
3.5 m in increments of 0.5 m. The range limit set is subject to a tolerance of
±0.2 m to ±0.3 m. The increments are represented by dotted radii.
To obtain the largest field diameter with a working distance Sa of 2.5 m, for
example, the limit distance Sg must be ≥ 3 m. That means that the range limit
must be set to 3.5 m. With a tolerance of ±0.3 m the SLG can then take up
communication within the field at a distance of between 3.2 m and 3.8 m to
the MDS.
At a working distance Sa of 2.5 m the field diameter is 3.0 m = transmission
window L.
Read/Write Devices
5-11
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
SLG
MDS
MDS
270 °C
90 °C
180 °C0 °C
Sa = 2.5 m
Sg = 3.0 m
L = 2.1 m
Figure 5-3 Transmission window of the SLG U92 (with FCC)
The transmission window is displayed in two views.
The MDS enters the SLG field at an angle of 180 °C or 0 °C.
The MDS enters the SLG field at an angle of 270 °C or 90 °C.
The antenna sides of the MDS and SLG are facing each other.
Transmission
window (SLG U92
with FCC)
Read/Write Devices
5-12 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The field edges are displayed by dotted lines. From above the field is almost
round. The field size can fluctuate slightly due to external influences.
The size of the field can be changed by setting the range limit from 0.5 m to
3.5 m in increments of 0.5 m. The range limit set is subject to a tolerance of
±0.2 m to ±0.3 m. The variable increments are represented by dotted radii.
To obtain the largest field diameter with a working distance Sa of 2.1 m, for
example, the limit distance Sg must be ≥ 3 m. That means that the range limit
must be set to 3.5 m. With a tolerance of ±0.3 m the SLG can then take up
communication within the field at a distance of between 3.2 m and a maxi-
mum of 3.5 m to the MDS.
At a working distance Sa of 2.1 m the field diameter is 2.1 m = transmission
window L.
L
W
D
Figure 5-4 Metal-free space of SLG U92
Metal-free space
Read/Write Devices
5-13
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The SLG U92 may be installed countersunk in surfaces, flush in metal or
inserted in supports, for example U or T supports.
Metal-free space is necessary to ensure good communication if the MDS
is countersunk in metal surfaces. The area of the metal-free space should
be a multiple of the wavelength λ = 122.45 mm " 1 mm where n w 8.
We recommend a metal installation box with an area of n * λ where n w
8 and a depth of m * λ/2 where m w 1. The area and depth relate to the
internal dimensions. You can place the SLG U92 anywhere in the installa-
tion box except directly on the bottom or where the connector and cable
for the SLG interface are to be placed. There should be openings for the
connector and cable.
The smallest installation box has an area of 8 * 122.45 mm = 979.6 mm
and a depth of 1 * 122.45 mm / 2 = 61.2 mm.
4. Example:
Area = 979.6 mm = 2 *L [mm] + 2 * W [mm] = 2 * 235 mm + 2 *
139.8 mm
The field geometry is reduced if the device is installed flush with the
metal and there may be restrictions in communication.
We recommend you also use the installation box if you use U or T sup-
ports. This ensures that the antenna field is less dependent on the environ-
ment.
Pertinax, acrylic, or non-polar plastic materials such as polyamide or PPS can
be used for covering the MDS U92, for example for protection against kik-
king.
Plastic materials suitable for RF welding absorb the RF field used for com-
munication. They are therefore not suitable.
It is difficult to make a statement about the suitability of wooden covers be-
cause of their moisture content and different impregnations.
Covers of acrylic glass or Pertinax with a thickness of 10 mm change the
field only slightly.
Covering materials
Read/Write Devices
5-14 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The distance between the SLG U92s depends on the type of application and
how the SLG U92s are arranged:
1. Two or more adjacent SLG U92s and only one MDS U in each detection
field
2. Two SLG U92s either adjacent or adjacent but turned toward each other
and only one MDS U in the same detection field
3. Several SLG U92s either adjacent or at an angle to each other and only
one MDS U in the same detection field
4. Two SLG U92s back to back
5. Two SLG U92s facing each other
6. Several adjacent SLG U92s and more than one MDS U in each detection
field
7. Several adjacent SLG U92s and more than one MDS U in the same detec-
tion field
The detection area is the part of the SLG U92 field in which the calculated
distance between the SLG U92 and the MDS U is less than or equal to the
value of the range limit dili [m] plus an offset of 0.5 m.
On point 1: Two or more adjacent SLG U92s and only one
MDS U in each detection field:
The SLG U92s can be installed next to each other at a distance Dx as long as
only one MDS U is in each detection field.
SLG U921SLG U922SLG U923
MDS U1MDS U2MDS U3
r1r2r3
D1D2
Figure 5-5 Distance D: two or more adjacent SLG U92s and only one MDS U in
each detection field
The range limit (dili) must provide sufficient demarcation. In other words, if
a circle forms around each SLG U92 with a radius rx = the range limit
dilix [m] + 0.5 m, the circles must not overlap.
Note
Communication can take some time, depending on the distance between the
SLGs and how they are arranged.
Definition of the
distance D
Read/Write Devices
5-15
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
On point 2: Two SLG U92s either adjacent or adjacent but turned
toward each other and only one MDS U in the same
detection field:
The SLG U92s can be installed next to each other at distance D as long as
only one MDS U is in the common detection field. The coordination of the
sequence of communication is controlled in the user application.
SLG U92
MDS U
SLG U92
MDS U
SLG U92 SLG U92
DaDb
α1α2
Figure 5-6 Distance D: two SLG U92s mounted either adjacent or adjacent but tur-
ned toward each other
Da w 200 mm
Db w 200 mm at an angle of inclination αx v 45° angle.
Example: Two SLG U92s at a processing station
At a processing station, the associated application
of the first or second SLG processes the data carrier,
depending on the information on the data carrier.
Depending on the strength of the field and the time behavior, a
SLG takes up communication
with the data carrier and the application checks whether it is
responsible. If it is not, it terminates communication or
doesn’t continue it. If it is, the application continues
communication until it is completed.
Note
The closer the SLG U92s are installed to each other and/or the greater the
angle of inclination αx, the longer communication can take.
Read/Write Devices
5-16 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
On point 3: Several SLG U92s either adjacent or at an angle to each
other and only one MDS U in the same detection field:
The SLG U92s can be installed next to each other as long as only one
MDS U is in the same detection field. The coordination of the sequence of
communication is controlled in the user application.
Note
The closer the SLG U92s are installed to each another, the greater the reduc-
tion in communication performance, which can lead to a total blockage.
On point 4: Two SLG U92s facing each other
You can select the distance D between the SLG U92s to ensure that reflec-
tions between the MDS U2 and SLG U921 with a length v r1 or the MDS U1
and SLG U922 with a length v r2 cannot occur.
Radius rx = range limit value of dilix [m] + 0.5 m
By preventing reflections or lengthening the reflection paths, you can reduce
the distance D between the SLG U92s. If there is a corresponding metallic
surface between the SLG U92s, the SLG U92s can be mounted directly be-
hind one another.
r2
SLG U921SLG U922
MDS U1MDS U2
D
r1
Figure 5-7 Distance D: two SLG U92s back to back
Read/Write Devices
5-17
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
On point 5: SLG U92s facing each other
The SLG U92s facing each other must be at least
D = 6 m away from one another and the detection fields of the SLG U92s
must not overlap. The range limit (dili) must provide sufficient demarcation.
In other words, if a circle forms around each SLG U92 with a radius rx = the
range limit value dilix [m] + 0.5 m, the circles must not overlap.
r1
SLG U92
MDS U
r2SLG U92
MDS U
D
Figure 5-8 Distance D: two SLG U92s opposite each other
The distance of 6 m is not sufficient if the range limit dilix exceeds certain
values. The minimum distances are specified below, depending on the range
limit.
Distance D w6.0 m, if:
dili1 v 2.5 m and dili2 v 2.5 m,
dili1 = 3.5 m and dili2 v 1.5 m or
dili1 v 1.5 m and dili2 = 3.5 m.
Distance D w6.5 m, if:
dili1 = 3.5 m and dili2 = 2.0 m,
dili1 = 3.0 m and dili2 = 2.5 m,
dili1 = 2.5 m and dili2 = 3.0 m or
dili1 = 2.0 m and dili2 = 3.5 m.
Distance D w7.0 m, if:
dili1 = 3.5 m and dili2 = 2.5 m,
dili1 = 3.0 m and dili2 = 3.0 m or
dili1 = 2.5 m and dili2 = 3.5 m.
Distance D w7.5 m, if:
dili1 = 3.5 m and dili2 = 3.0 m or
dili1 = 3.0 m and dili2 = 3.5 m.
Distance Dw8.0 m, if:
dili1 = 3.5 m and dili2 = 3.5 m.
Read/Write Devices
5-18 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
On point 6: Several adjacent SLG U92s and more than one
MDS U in each detection field:
The adjacent SLG U92s must be at least 6 m away from each another and the
detection fields of the SLG U92s must not overlap. The range limit (dili)
must provide sufficient demarcation. In other words, if a circle forms around
each SLG U92 with a radius rx = the range limit value dilix [m] + 0.5 m,
these circles must not overlap.
The distance of 6 m is not sufficient if the range limit dilix exceeds certain
values. The minimum distances are specified below, depending on the range
limit.
Distance D w6.0 m, if:
dili1 v 2.5 m and dili2 v 2.5 m,
dili1 = 3.5 m and dili2 v 1.5 m or
dili1 v 1.5 m and dili2 = 3.5 m.
Distance D w6.5 m, if:
dili1 = 3.5 m and dili2 = 2.0 m,
dili1 = 3.0 m and dili2 = 2.5 m,
dili1 = 2.5 m and dili2 = 3.0 m or
dili1 = 2.0 m and dili2 = 3.5 m.
Distance D w7.0 m, if:
dili1 = 3.5 m and dili2 = 2.5 m,
dili1 = 3.0 m and dili2 = 3.0 m or
dili1 = 2.5 m and dili2 = 3.5 m.
Distance D w7.5 m, if:
dili1 = 3.5 m and dili2 = 3.0 m or
dili1 = 3.0 m and dili2 = 3.5 m.
Distance D w8.0 m, if:
dili1 = 3.5 m and dili2 = 3.5 m.
On point 7: Several adjacent SLG U92s and more than one
MDS U in the common detection field:
In this case, automatic synchronization of the SLG U92s among each other is
required. This is achieved by interconnecting them via the service interface.
A maximum of three SLG U92s can be interconnected in this way.
One SLG U92 becomes active, which means it starts communication and the
other(s) remain(s) passive. The next SLG U92 only receives communication
priority once the active SLG has completed communication.
As an alternative to automatic synchronization via the service interface, syn-
chronization can also be carried out using the application by switching the
antenna for each SLG U92 on and off alternately by means of commands.
The antenna of only one SLG U92 can be switched on at any one time.
Read/Write Devices
5-19
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Service interface To ASM/PC
135
110
42
6
23.2
290
4,7 270
42
∅6.5
Figure 5-9 Dimensional drawing of the SLG U92
Dimensions
(in mm)
Read/Write Devices
5-20 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Read/Write Devices
6-1
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Interfaces 6
6-2 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
6.1 Introduction
The ASM interfaces are the link between the MOBY U components (SLGs/
MDSs) and the high-level controllers (e.g., SIMATIC S7) or PCs or compu-
ters. Depending on the interface used, up to two SLGs can be connected.
An ASM consists of a microcontroller system with its own program (PROM).
The CPU receives commands via the user interface and stores these in RAM.
The user receives an acknowledgment that the command has arrived. If the
command is okay, the CPU begins executing it.
Table 6-1 Overview of the interfaces
ASM
Type
Interfaces
to PC/
Computer
Interfaces
to SLG
Function
Blocks
SLG
Connec-
tions
Dimensions
(W x H x D in
mm)
Temperature
Range
(Operation)
Degree
of Pro-
tection
ASM 452 PROFIBUS
DPV1
2 x 5-pin
prox. switch
connector
FC 45
FC 46
FC 56
1134 x 110 x 55 0 to +55°CIP 67
ASM 473 Can be plug-
ged into
ET 200X
2 x 5-pin
prox. switch
connector
FC 45
FC 56
187 x 110 x 55 0 to +55°CIP 67
ASM 475 Can be plug-
ged into
S7-300/
ET 200M
Via screw
terminals
FC 45
FC 56
2
(parallel)
40 x 125 x 120 0 to +60°CIP 20
ASM 480 TCP/IP 9-pin submi-
niature
D connector
C library
MOBY API
1110 x 130 x 80 0 to +50 °CIP 20
Application area
Setup and
functions
Overview
Interfaces
6-3
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
6.2 ASM 452
The ASM 452 interface module is a MOBY module for use with MOBY
components via PROFIBUS DPV1 on the following devices:
All computers and PCs
All controllers
When the interfaces are used with a SIMATIC S7, function blocks are avail-
able to the user.
Figure 6-1 Interface ASM 452
The ASM 452 is a logical further development of the familiar ASM 450/451
interface modules. Thanks to the use of acyclic data communication on the
PROFIBUS DPV1, optimum data throughput is achieved even in large
PROFIBUS configurations. The minimum cyclic data load of the ASM 452
on PROFIBUS guarantees the user that other PROFIBUS stations (e.g. DI/
DO) will continue to be processed very quickly.
The ASM 452 is an interface module for communication between
PROFIBUS and the SLG U92 with RS 422. Using the ASM 452, the data on
the MDS U313/315/524/525/589 can be addressed in two different ways:
Physically (normal addressing)
Using a DOS-like file management system (filehandler)
The SIMATIC S7 offers FCs for the two methods of access.
FC 45 for ”normal” addressing
FC 46 for filehandler without multitag; FC 56 for filehandler with multi-
tag
FC 45 and FC 46/56 give the S7 user an easy-to-use interface with powerful
commands. FC 45 and FC 56 offer additional command chaining and S7 data
structures via UDTs.
Application area
Interfaces
6-4 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 6-2 Ordering data of the ASM 452
ASM 452 interface module
for PROFIBUS DPV1
1x SLG U92 with RS 422 connectable
6GT2 002-0EB20
Accessories:
Connector for PROFIBUS DP connection
and 24 V supply
SLG cable ASM 452 SLG
Length 2 m; standard cable
Other lengths 5 m, 10 m, 20 m and 50 m
Opt. connector without SLG cable
(for cable lengths > 20 m)
ASM 452 SLG
M12 covering caps for unused SLG connec-
tions (1 package = 10 each)
MOBY software 1)
with FC 46, FC 45, FC 56, DDB file
6ES7 194-1AA00-0XA0
6GT2 091-1CH20
6GT2 091-1C...
6GT2 090-0BC00
3RX9 802-0AA00
6GT2 080-2AA10
Replacement part:
Connector plate; T design for
PROFIBUS connection
6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0
Description of FC 45 (for ASM 452)
German
English
6GT2 097-3AM00-0DA1
6GT2 097-3AM00-0DA2
Description of FC 46 (for ASM 452)
German
English
6GT2 097-3AC40-0DA1
6GT2 097-3AC40-0DA2
Description of FC 56 On MOBY Software CD
1) See chapter 7.1
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-5
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 6-3 Technical data of ASM 452
ASM 452
with FC 45
ASM 452
with FC 46
ASM 452
with FC 56
Serial interface to user PROFIBUS DPV1
Procedure after connection EN 50170, vol. 2, PROFIBUS
PG 11 screw connection
PROFIBUS and power supply connectors are not inclu
Transmission speed
PROFIBUS
an
d
power
supp
l
y
connectors
are
not
i
nc
l
u-
ded.
9600 Baud to 12 Mbps (automatic detection)
Max. block length 2 words (cyclic)/240 bytes (non-cyclic)
Serial interface to SLG
Connector
Line length, max.
2 M12 coupling connectors
2 m = standard length;
Other prefabricated cables: 5 m, 10 m, 20 m,
50 ( t 1000 t)
50 m (up to 1000 m on request)
SLGs which can be connec-
ted
1x SLG U92 with RS 422
Software functions
Programming Depends on the PROFIBUS DP master
Function blocks for
SIMATIC S7
FC 45 FC 46 FC 56
MDS addressing Direct access with ad-
dresses
Access via logical file names
(file system similar to DOS)
Commands Initialize MDS, read
data from MDS, write
data to MDS, and so on
Format MDS, read file, write
file, and so on
Multitag capability No No Ye s
S7 data structures via UDTs Yes No Yes
Voltage
Nominal value
Permissible range
Current consumption
24 VDC
20 to 30 VDC
max. 180 mA; typ. 130 mA
(without SLG, DO not loaded)
Digital inputs None
Digital outputs None
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transportation and storage
0 to +55 °C
–40 to +70 °C
Dimensions (W x H x D) in
mm
134 x 110 x 55 (without bus connector)
Mounting 4 M5 screws;
mounting on all plates or walls
Technical data
Interfaces
6-6 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 6-3 Technical data of ASM 452
ASM 452
with FC 56
ASM 452
with FC 46
ASM 452
with FC 45
Weight, approx. 0.5 kg
Degree of protection IP 67
MTBF (at 40 °C) 30 104 hours = 34 years
PROFIBUS DP
master module
e.g. S7-400 CPU
PROFIBUS line
To other PROFI-
BUS stations
AT-comp. PC
24 V
for ASM
and SLG
SLG
* Standard cable lengths
2 m*
MDS
Figure 6-2 Configurator – ASM 452
The ASM 452 has the same housing as the distributed I/O device ET 200X.
For the general chapters on the ASM 452 (e.g., mounting, operation and wi-
ring, general technical data) see the ET 200X manual (order no. 6ES7
198-8FA00-8AA0). Accessories and network components are also covered by
this manual.
The ASM 452 is integrated in the hardware configuration with a DDB file.
The ASM can then be configured using SIMATIC Manager’s HWCONFIG or
another PROFIBUS tool.
The ASM is then configured with HWCONFIG of SIMATIC Manager or an-
other PROFIBUS tool. ”MOBY software” contains a DDB file for the
ASM 452.
Hardware descrip-
tion
PROFIBUS confi-
guration
Interfaces
6-7
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
An SLG always occupies two M12 connection sockets on the ASM 452.
A prefabricated cable therefore provides the best possible easy connection of
the SLG (cf. Figure 6-4). The standard version of the connecting cable is 2 m
long; other available lengths are 5 m, 10 m, 20 m and 50 m.
If users wish to fabricate their cables themselves to suit their requirements,
an SLG connector with screw terminals is available (see Figure 6-3). Cables
and SLG connectors can be ordered from the MOBY catalog.
SLG cable: 6GT2 090-0A
PG 11 screw connection;
Max. cable diameter = 6.5 mm
(Don’t tighten screw until connector
is assembled)
2 screws to open
the connector
Coupling connector
M12 on ASM 452
1
2
3
4
5
6
S
S
Connec-
tor Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
S
S
Core
Color
Green
White
Brown
Yellow
Gray
Pink
- (nc)
Shield
Connection to
Pin of SLG
Connector
4
6
1
5
3
2
-
Connector covering hood removed
Degree of protection IP 67
48
18,5
Figure 6-3 Connector for the ASM 452, 473 SLG U92 with RS 422
(6GT2 090-0BC00)
6
1
4
5
3
2
two 5-pin round
M12 connectors
X1/2
X1/3
X1/1
X1/4
X2/3
X2/1
X1/5
X2/5
X1 X2
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
Pink
SLG connector
(socket)
2 m *
22,5
18,5
* Standard length
Figure 6-4 Connecting cable for the ASM 452, 473 SLG U92 with RS 422
(6GT2 091-1CH20)
SLG connection
system
Interfaces
6-8 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The following diagram shows a dimensional drawing of the ASM 452 with
bus connectors. The length of the PG screws and the radius of the cable must
both be added to the total width and depth specified below.
110
90
53.5 28.25
134
120
Ø 5.5
Figure 6-5 Dimensional drawing of the ASM 452
Dimensional
drawing
Interfaces
6-9
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The figure below shows the pin allocations of the ASM 452.
1 +RxD
2 +TxD
3 -TxD
4 -RxD
5PE
1 +24 V
2 Res.
30 V
4 Res.
5PE
1
2
3
4
5
654
32
1
X1 X2
X3 X4
654
654
32
1
32
1
X11
X12
X13
Socket
X11 and X12
(PROFIBUS DP)
Pin Allocation
1 Signal B
2PE
3* PE
4 Signal A
5* L+
6* M
X13
(power supply)
1PE
2L+
3M
4PE
5L+
6M
SF
BF
ON
24 VDC
LEDs for MOBY
RxD: Communication with SLG active
ANW: MDS present
ERR: Error indicator
All other LEDs are not assigned.
LEDs for PROFIBUS DP
SF: System Fault (hardware error on ASM)
BF: Bus Fault (fault on PROFIBUS DP)
ON: On when there is logic voltage applied
to the ASM 452 (generated from 24 V
supply voltage).
DC 24 V: On when 24 V is connected to
ASM 452
* Don’t circuit
Pin Allocation (SLG)
Socket
X1/X3
RxD
ERR ANW
DE0 DE1
SLG2
RxD
X2/X4
SLG1
Not available for MOBY U
Figure 6-6 Interfaces and displays of the ASM 452
Pin allocations
Interfaces
6-10 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The following figure shows an example of how to bare a cable. The lengths
apply to all cables which you can connect to the connectors. Twist existing
shield braiding, stick in a core sleeve, and trim off excess.
Twisted and trimmed
shield braiding
45
6
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure 6-7 Length of bared cable for PROFIBUS cable
The connector plate of the ASM must be removed before you can set the
PROFIBUS address or turn on the terminating resistance. The connector plate
covers the DIP switches. The following figure shows the location of the
DIP switches on the ASM and the applicable sample setting.
Example: PROFIBUS address 120 (status on delivery)
7654321
ON
23 +24 + 25 + 26 = 8 + 16 + 32 + 64 = 120
8
Example: Terminating resistance on (status on delivery)
OFF
ON
Res.
Filehandler
Figure 6-8 Setting PROFIBUS address/turning on terminating resistance
Note
The PROFIBUS address on the ASM 452 must always be the same as the
PROFIBUS address specified for this ASM in the configuration software.
You must always turn both DIP switches either on or off so that the ter-
minating resistance is correct.
Example of how
much cable to bare
PROFIBUS
address and termi-
nating resistance
Interfaces
6-11
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
6.3 ASM 473
The ASM 473 interface module is a MOBY module for SIMATIC S7. It can
be installed in the ET 200X and DESINA distributed I/O device. Operation
of the ET 200X in the direction of the use is via PROFIBUS DPV1. A S7-300
or S7-400 with integrated PROFIBUS connection can be used as the control-
ler.
The ASM 473 supplements the SIMATIC S7 MOBY interface module
ASM 475. As it has degree of protection IP67, it can be mounted and oper-
ated directly on the process without any additional protective housing.
An ET 200X basic module (BM 141/142) with the order number
6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0 or 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0 or a BM 143 is a prereq-
uisite for using the ASM 473.
Using the ASM 473 the data can be addressed to the
MDS U313/315/524/525/589 either:
Physically (normal addressing)
Using a DOS-like file management system (filehandler)
The SIMATIC S7 offers a function for each of the two methods of access.
FC 45 for ”normal” addressing
FC 56 for Filehandler
FC 45 and FC 56 give the S7 user an easy-to-use interface with powerful
commands. FC 45 and FC 56 offer additional command chaining and S7 data
structures via UDTs.
The hardware configuration of the ASM 473 is performed with an Object
Manager (OM) which is integrated in SIMATIC Manager.
Other features:
Up to 7 ASM 473s can be run in parallel on one ET 200X station.
All I/O modules from the ET 200X family can be run parallel to the
ASM 473.
Figure 6-9 Interface ASM 473
Application area
Interfaces
6-12 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 6-4 Ordering data of the ASM 473
Interface ASM 473
1x SLG U92 with RS 422 can be connected
6GT2 002-0HA10
Accessory:
SLG cable ASM 473 SLG
Length 2 m; standard cable
Other lengths 5 m, 10 m, 20 m and 50 m
Opt. connector without SLG cable
ASM 473 SLG (for cable lengths > 20 m)
MOBY software 1
with FC 45, FC 56, DDB file
6GT2 091-1CH20
6GT2 091-1C...
6GT2 090-0BC00
6GT2 080-2AA10
Description of FC 45 (for ASM 473)
German
English
6GT2 097-3AM00-0DA1
6GT2 097-3AM00-0DA2
Description of FC 56 On MOBY Software CD
1 See chapter 7.1
Table 6-5 Technical data of the ASM 473
Interface to the ET 200X
Communication
Command buffer on ASM
SIMATIC S7 P bus,
cyclic/non-cyclic services
2 words (cyclic)/
238 bytes (non-cyclic)
142 x 238 bytes
Serial interface to SLG
Connector
Line length, max.
SLGs which can be connected
2 M12 coupling connectors
2 m = standard length;
Other prefabricated cables = 5 m,
10 m, 20 m, 50 m
(up to 1000 m on request)
1x SLG U92 with RS 422
Software functions
Programming
Function blocks for SIMATIC S7
MDS addressing
Commands
PROFIBUS diagnosis
S7 diagnosis
Firmware can be loaded.
Depends on PROFIBUS DP ma-
ster
FC 45
Direct access with addresses
Initialize MDS, read data from
MDS, write data to MDS, and so
on
Yes; in accordance with ET 200X
basis station
Yes, can be called via S7 OEM
Yes, via S7 OEM
Ordering data
Technical data
Interfaces
6-13
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 6-5 Technical data of the ASM 473
Voltage
Nominal value
Permissible range
Current consumption
Power loss of the module
24 VDC
20.4 V to 28.8 VDC
typ. 75 mA; max. 500 mA (or see
technical data of your SLG)
typ. 1.6 W
Digital inputs/outputs Via expansion modules from the
ET 200X family
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transportation and storage
0 °C to +55 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
Single device
Scaling interval
Mounting
Degree of protection
Weight, approx.
87 x 110 x 55
60 x 110 x 55
2 M5 screws (supplied by custo-
mer)
2 M3 screws (supplied by device)
IP 67
0.275 kg
For information on setup and other general technical data, see the ET 200X
manual (order number 6SE7 198-8FA01-8AA0).
Interfaces
6-14 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
PROFIBUS DP master module;
e.g. S7-400 CPU
(Connection of master of other ven-
dor being prepared)
2 m (standard cable length)
MDS
PROFIBUS
to all
PROFIBUS slaves
24 V power for ET
200X electronics and
MOBY SLG
SLG
Basic module:
ET 200X; BM 141
ET 200X; BM 142
DESINA; BM 143
Figure 6-10 Configurator for an ASM 473
Note
The ET 200X differs from the ASM 452 (see figure 6-2) in that the 24 V
must be fed to the PROFIBUS connector and the load voltage connector (see
ET 200X manual for more information).
Configuration
Interfaces
6-15
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
A max. of 7 ASM 473s can be op-
erated in one ET 200X.
Figure 6-11 Maximum configuration of ASM 473s on one ET 200X
Depending on the PROFIBUS master, up to 123 ET 200X modules can be
operated on one PROFIBUS branch.
The ASM 473 is integrated in the hardware configuration of SIMATIC Mana-
ger by calling Setup.exe in the data/S7_OM directory on the ”Software
MOBY” CD. At the moment the ASM 473 cannot be integrated on the ma-
ster of another manufacturer.
An SLG always occupies two M12 connection sockets X3 and X4 on the
ASM 473. A prefabricated cable therefore provides the best possible easy
connection of the SLG (cf. Figure 6-4). The standard version of the connec-
tion cable has a length of 2 m. Other lengths are available on request.
An SLG connector with screw terminals is available for users who want to
make their own cables (see figure 6-3). Cables and SLG connectors can be
ordered from the MOBY catalog.
Hardware
configuration
SLG connection
system
Interfaces
6-16 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The following figure shows the pin allocation to the SLG and describes the
indicator elements.
ERR
ON (perm.)
OFF
OFF
2 Hz
5 Hz
1 flash
every
2 sec
PRE
OFF/ON
ON
2 Hz
2 Hz
5 Hz
OFF
Socket Pin Allocation (SLG)
1
2
3
4
5
+RxD
+TxD
–TxD
–RxD
PE
LEDs for PROFIBUS DP
General operating LEDs (SF, BF, ON, DC24 V) are located on the
basic module of the ET 200X.
LEDs for MOBY
RxD: SLG is active with a command
PRE: Indicates the presence of an MDS
ERR: Error indication by flashing pattern (see Section B.1)
X3
1
2
3
4
5
+24 V
n.c.
0 V
n.c.
PE
X4
The PRE and ERR LEDs indicate other operational states of the ASM.
Description, Causes, Remedies
Hardware is defective (RAM, Flash, etc.).
Loader is defective (can only be fixed at the plant).
Firmware loading procedure is active or no
frmware detected
→Load firmware
→Don’t turn off ASM during this.
Firmware loading terminated with error
→New start is required
→Load firmware again
→Check update files
Operating system error
→Turn ASM or ET 200X basis station
off/on.
ASM has started up and is waiting for a RESET
(init_run) from the user.
Figure 6-12 Interfaces and LEDs of the ASM 473
Pin allocations
Interfaces
6-17
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The figure below shows the dimensions for the positions of the holes for the
mounting screws for one basic module and one ASM 473 expansion module.
n 60
120
53.5
n = number of expansion modules
28.25
126.8
BM 141/142 ASM 473
87
110
For M5 mounting
screw
Figure 6-13 Dimensions for mounting holes for basic and expansion modules
Dimensional dra-
wing of mounting
holes
Interfaces
6-18 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
6.4 ASM 475
The ASM 475 interface module is a MOBY module which can be installed
on the SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M.
Up to eight ASM 475 interface modules can be installed and run in one mod-
ule rack of the SIMATIC S7-300. When a setup with several module racks
(max. of four) is used, the ASM 475 can be installed and run in every rack. In
its maximum configuration, one SIMATIC S7-300 can handle up to 32 ASMs
centrally. The ASMs can just as well be run on the distributed I/O ET 200M
on PROFIBUS. This makes operation in an S7-400 environment possible.
Up to 7 ASMs can be run on one ET 200M.
Error messages and operational states are indicated with LEDs.
The galvanic isolation between SLG and the SIMATIC S7-300 bus permits
interference-immune operation.
Figure 6-14 Interface ASM 475
The ASM 475 is an interface module for communication between the
SIMATIC S7 and the SLG U92 with RS 422. Using the ASM 475, the data on
the MDS U313/315/524/525/589 can be addressed in two different ways:
Physically (normal addressing)
Using a DOS-like file management system (filehandler)
The SIMATIC S7 offers a function for each of the two methods of access.
FC 45 for ”normal” addressing
FC 56 for Filehandler
FC 45 and FC 56 give the S7 user an easy-to-use interface with powerful
commands. FC 45 and FC 56 offer additional command chaining and S7 data
structures via UDTs.
Application area
Interfaces
6-19
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
6GT2 091-0E...
ASM 475
SLG SLG
Shield connection terminal
(6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0)
Shield connecting element
(6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0)
for 2 modules
MDS MDS
Figure 6-15 Configuration for the ASM 475 (central)
Table 6-6 Ordering data for ASM 475
Interface ASM 475
for SIMATIC S7
2 x SLG U92 with RS 422 can be connected pa-
rallel, without front connector
6GT2 002-0GA10
Accessory:
Front connector (1 per ASM)
SLG cable, ASM 475 SLG
Lengths: 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, and 50 m
Optional: SLG cable, ASM 475 → SLG
with straight SLG connector
Shield connection terminal (1 per SLG cable)
Shield connecting element
MOBY software 1)
with FC 45, FC 56, S7 Object Manager
6ES7 392-1AJ00 -0AA0
6GT2 091-0E...
6GT2 091-2E...
6ES7 390-5BA00 -0AA0
6ES7 390-5AA00 -0AA0
6GT2 080-2AA10
Description of FC 45 (for ASM 475)
German
English
6GT2 097-3AM00-0DA1
6GT2 097-3AM00-0DA2
Description of FC 56 On MOBY Software CD
1) See chapter 7.1
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-20 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 6-7 Technical data of the ASM 475
ASM 475 with FC 45 ASM 475 with FC 56
Serial interface to
SIMATIC S7-300 or
ET 200M
Communication
Command buffer on
ASM 475
P bus; cyclic and non-cyclic services
2 words (cyclic)/238 bytes (non-cyclic)
142 x 238 bytes per SLG U92
Serial interface to SLG
Connector With screw terminal on front connector
The front connector is included.
Line length, max. Prefabricated cables = 2 m, 5 m, 10 m,
50 m (up to 1000 m on request)
SLGs which can be connec-
ted
2x SLG U92 with RS 422
Parallel operation
Software functions
Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DP master
Function blocks for
SIMATIC S7
MDS addressing
Commands
Multitag mode
S7 data structures via UDTs
FC 45
Access directly via ad-
dresses
Initialize MDS,
read data from MDS,
write data to MDS, and
so on.
No
Yes
FC 56
Access via logical
file names (file system
similar to DOS)
Format MDS,
read file,
write file, and so on
Yes
Yes
Voltage
Nominal value
Permissible range
Current consumption
Without SLG at U =
24 VDC, max.
With connected SLGs,
max.
Power loss of the mo-
dule(typ.)
Current consumption from
P bus, max.
Potential isolation between
S7-300 and MOBY
24 V fuse to SLG
24 VDC
20.4 to 28.8 VDC
350 mA
500 mA, per connected SLG
2 W
80 mA
Yes
Yes, electronic
Technical data
Interfaces
6-21
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
ASM 475 with FC 56ASM 475 with FC 45
Ambient temperature during
operation
Horizontal setup of
SIMATIC
Vertical setup of
SIMATIC
Transportation and storage
0 to +60 °C
0 to +40 °C
–40 to +70 °C
Dimensions (W x H x D)
in mm
40 x 125 x 120
Weight, approx. 0.2 kg
Wiring The ASM 475 is commissioned in the following steps.
Mount module
Mount module on profile rail of the S7-300
(see manual of the S7-300)
Note
Before mounting the module, switch the CPU of the S7-300 to STOP.
!Warning
Wire the S7-300 only when the power is off.
Note
To ensure interference-free operation of the ASM 475, make sure that ASM
and SIMATIC CPU (or ASM and IM 153 with ET 200M operation) use the
same voltage.
If not, error indicators which light up on the CPU when the ASM is turned
on may not go off.
Interfaces
6-22 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Front plate The following figure shows the front plate of the ASM 475 and the inside of
the front door with the connection diagram. The SLGs must be connected
with the ASM as shown in the connection diagram.
Status and error indicators
SLG 1
T+
T–
R+
R–
SLG 2
T+
T–
R+
R–
SLG connection diagram
The numbers for the
connection refer to con-
nector X1 of the upper
portion of the housing.
ASM 475 SF
DC5 V
ACT_1
ERR_1
PRE_1
RxD_1
ACT_2
ERR_2
PRE_2
RxD_2
6GT2 002-0GA10
MOBY
Figure 6-16 Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 475
Interfaces
6-23
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 6-8 Function of the LEDs on the ASM 475
LED Meaning
SF
5 VDC
System Fault (hardware error on ASM)
24 V are connected on ASM and the 5 V
on the ASM are okay
ACT_1, ACT_2
Error 1 Error 2
y
The SLG is active with execution of a
user command.
A flashing pattern shows the error that oc-
E
rror_
1
,
E
rror_
2
A fl
as
hi
ng
pattern
s
h
ows
t
h
e
error
t
h
at
oc-
curred last. This indicator can be reset
with the parameter Option_1.
Shows the
p
resence of an MDS;
PRE_1, PRE_2
RxD_1, RxD_2
Shows the presence of an MDS;
Indicates running communication with the
SLG; interference on SLG can also cause
this indicator to go on.
The LEDs PRE, ERR and SF on the ASM 475 indicate additional operating
states.
Table 6-9 Operating states shown by LEDs on the ASM 475
SF PRE_1 ERR_1 PRE_2 ERR_2 Meaning
ON
ON
OFF
OFF/ON
OFF
2 Hz
ON
(perm.)
ON
OFF
OFF/ON
OFF
2 Hz
ON
(perm.)
OFF
OFF
Hardware is defective
(RAM, Flash, etc.).
Loader is defective (can
only be fixed at the plant).
Firmware loading proce-
dure is active or no firm-
ware was detected.
Load firmware
Don’t turn off ASM
during this.
OFF 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz Firmware loading termina-
ted with error
New start required
Load firmware again
Check update files
Any 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz Operating system error
Turn ASM off/on.
OFF OFF 1 flash
every
2 sec
OFF 1 flash
every
2 sec
ASM has started up and is
waiting for a RESET
(init_run) from the user.
Indicator elements
on the ASM
Interfaces
6-24 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The following figure shows the design of a connection cable between ASM
and SLG. The specified colors apply to the standard MOBY cable for the
ASM 475.
SLG – connector
(socket)
Cable with core sleeves
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Pink
Gray
(Shield)
6
1
4
5
2
3
4 (12)
5 (13)
6 (14)
7 (15)
8 (16)
9 (17)
Front connector
of the ASM
(6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0)
Cable shield open
Figure 6-17 Wiring of the ASM 475 to the SLG U92 with RS 422 (6GT2 091-0E...)
See Figure 3-35 or 6-15.
Implement lightning rods and grounding measures if required for your appli-
cation. Protection against lightning always requires an individual look at the
entire plant.
To ensure EMC, the SLG cable must be led over an S7-300 shield connecting
element (see figure 6-15). When customers make their own cables, the shield
of the SLG cable must be bared as shown in figure 6-18.
Specifications
in mm
30 170
Figure 6-18 Baring of the cable shield for customer-fabricated cable
Wiring to the SLG
Shield connection
Lightning rods
Cable fabrication
by the customer
Interfaces
6-25
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Note
Installation of MOBY requires functional STEP 7 software on a PC/PG.
Please remember to use the latest version of STEP 7.
Installation and configuration of the ASM 475 in the SIMATIC is performed
with an installation program. The installation program is included on the
”MOBY Software” CD product (6GT2 080-2AA10).
Installation information can be found on the “Software MOBY” CD.
You can use the file dearchiving function of SIMATIC Manager to load the
FC with a sample project from the relevant subdirectory of “Software
MOBY”. The sample project is located in the S7PROJ directory of SIMATIC
Manager.
Configuration of
the ASM for
SIMATIC S7 under
STEP 7
Installation
FC 45/56 with
sample project
Interfaces
6-26 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
6.5 ASM 480
The ASM 480 interface module is a MOBY module for the operation of
MOBY components in Ethernet networks with the TCP/IP protocol on com-
puters and PCs running Windows 98/NT/2000/XP.
The ASM 480 is an interface module for communication between a TCP cli-
ent and the SLG U92 read/write device via Ethernet. The interface to the
SLG U92 can be operated with either RS 232 or RS 422.
Figure 6-19 Interface ASM 480
The ASM 480 is an intelligent protocol converter (gateway) that bidirection-
ally converts the 3964R procedure for the SLG U92 into the TCP/IP protocol
for the host system (e.g. PC). The fact that the 3964R protocol is handled
locally means that there no negative effects on the dynamic response on the
serial interface because of any system-related delays on the network side, as
can happen in the case of simple terminal servers (COM port servers,
COM port emulators, etc.). In functional terms the ASM 480 is a TCP server
with which any TCP client can be connected and can exchange data with the
MOBY U identification system.
An easy-to-use programming interface (MOBY API) is available for applica-
tions running under Windows. The application programming interface han-
dles the message frame traffic with the SLG U92 (via Ethernet) and the
ASM 480. The data on the MDS U313/315/524/525/589 is addressed physi-
cally (“normal” addressing).
Application area
Interfaces
6-27
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 6-10 Ordering data of the ASM 480
ASM 480 interface module
Ethernet gateway with serial interface
RS 232/RS 422
1x SLG U92 connectable with RS 232 or
RS 422
6GT2 002-0JA00
Accessories:
Industrial housing for ASM 480, degree of pro-
tection IP65
Housing dimensions [W x H x D] in mm:
360 x 200 x 150
on request
SLG cable, ASM 480 ↔ SLG U92
Length 2 m; standard cable
Other lengths 5 m, 10 m, 20 m and 50 m
6GT2 091-0EH20
6GT2 091-0E...
Optional: SLG cable, ASM 480 ↔ SLG U92
with straight connector 6GT2 091-2E...
Connector, SLG-side with straight output 6GT2 090-0UA00
Connector, SLG-side with angled output
1 connector
1 packaging unit (10 connectors)
6GT2 090-0BA00
6GT2 090-0BA10
Stub line: type 6 x 0.25 mm2
Length according to length code
6GT2 090-0A...
MOBY wide-range power pack (see Section 7.2)
incl. 2 mating connectors for the output voltage
6GT2 494-0AA00
M12 socket for output voltage from MOBY
wide-range power pack
6GT2 390-1AB00
MOBY software (see Section 7.1)
with MOBY API and programming guide
6GT2 080-2AA10
Table 6-11 Technical data of ASM 480
Network interface Ethernet, IEEE 802.3 (CSMA/CD)
Category
Protocol
Connection type
Transmission speed
Plug connector
10 BASE T, floating
TCP/IP
TCP server
10 Mbit/s
RJ45
Serial interface to SLG RS 232C or RS 422, non-floating
Type
Protocol
Transmission speed
Connector
Line length with RS 232
Line length with RS 422
Asynchronous, half duplex
3964 R
Max. 38400 bit/s, depending on line length
9-pin subminiature D connector (pin)
Max. 30 m (shielded)
Max. 50 m (shielded), 1000 m on request
Ordering data
Technical data
Interfaces
6-28 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 6-11 Technical data of ASM 480
Diagnostic interface RS 232C
Transmission speed
Connector
Diagnostic and parameterization
software for ASM
9600 bit/s
9-pin subminiature D connector (pin)
Special cable for connection to PC enclosed
Enclosed on CD
Voltage
Nominal value
Permissible range
Current consumption, approx.
24 V DC
18 to 30 V DC
200 mA at 24 V
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transportation and storage
0 °C to +50 °C
0 °C to +50 °C
Other data
Operating elements
Display
Weight, approx.
Dimensions (W x D x H) in mm
Mounting
Degree of protection
6 jog keys
LCD with 2 x 16 characters
500 g
110 x 130 x 80
DIN EN 50022 mounting rail
IP 20
Programming interface (MOBY
API)
Can be used for operating systems Windows 98/NT4.0/2000/
Windows XP1
1 Under preparation
Interfaces
6-29
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
MOBY API
for easy data exchange
with the identification system
6GT2 080-2AA10
(MOBY software)
Standard
patch cable
Ethernet hub/switch
Standard
patch cable
MOBY wide-range
power pack
6GT2 494-0AA00
ASM 480
6GT2 002-0JA00 Standard terminals
e.g. Wago
SLG U92 RS 422
6GT2 501-0CA00
PC
230 V
24 V
Figure 6-20 Configuration for an ASM 480
Configuration
Interfaces
6-30 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The following diagram shows the dimensional drawing of an ASM 480.
Figure 6-21 Dimensional drawing of the ASM 480
Dimensional
drawing
Interfaces
6-31
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The table below shows the pin allocations of the ASM 480.
Table 6-12 Interfaces of the ASM 480
Ethernet interface (X1) Serial interface (X2)
18
Housing side
8-pin RJ45 connector (socket)
Housing side
9-pin subminiature D connector (pin)
Pin Allocation Pin Allocation
RS 232C RS 422
1 TX+ 1 Free –TxD
2 TX– 2 RxD Free
3 RX+ 3 TxD Free
4 Free 4 Free +RxD
5 Free 5 GND GND
6 RX– 6 Free +TxD
7 Free 7 RTS Free
8 Free 8 CTS Free
9 Free –RxD
The 24 V supply must be connected to the two screw terminals (0 V, 24 V).
Pin allocations
Interfaces
6-32 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The DIP switches for the terminating resistors of the serial interface in
RS 422 operation are located on the right-hand side of the housing. The ter-
mination amounts to 120 Ω and 470 Ω as a pull-up/pull-down resistor in each
case.
Terminating resistors ON
Terminating resistors OFF
1 2 3 4
1234
Figure 6-22 DIP switches on the ASM 480
The design of a connecting cable between the ASM 480 and SLG U92 with
RS 232 is shown in the diagram below. The specified colors apply to the
standard MOBY cable (6GT2 091-0E...).
The power supply to the SLG is provided via the two open cable ends (see
Figure 6-23) (6GT2 091-0E...). The MOBY wide-range power pack
(6GT2 494-0AA00) is available as an accessory for power supply.
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
6
1
4
5
2
3
5
2
n.c.
Open cable ends
ASM side SLG side
3
Pink
Housing
Connection via
standard terminals
0 V 24 V DC
9-pin submin D
(socket)
SLG
connector
(socket)
Figure 6-23 Wiring of the ASM 480 to the SLG U92 with RS 232 (6GT2 091-0E...)
DIP switches
Wiring to the
SLG U92 with
RS 232
Interfaces
6-33
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The design of a connecting cable between the ASM 480 and SLG U92 with
RS 422 is shown in the diagram below. The specified colors apply to the
standard MOBY cable (6GT2 091-0E...).
The power supply to the SLG is provided via the two open cable ends (see
Figure 6-24) (6GT2 091-0E...).
The MOBY wide-range power pack (6GT2 494-0AA00) is available as an
accessory for power supply.
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
6
1
4
5
2
6
1
4
9
Open cable ends
ASM side SLG side
3
Pink
Housing
Connection via
standard terminals
0 V 24 V DC
9-pol. submin D
(socket)
SLG
connector
(socket)
Figure 6-24 Wiring of the ASM 480 to the SLG U92 with RS 422 (6GT2 091-0E...)
The ASM 480 must be parameterized in order to operate it in Ethernet net-
works. The following must be parameterized:
The TCP/IP configuration: IP address, network mask and IP address of
the standard gateway and
The serial interface.
The parameterization method is described in the MOBY API C library pro-
gramming guide (see Table A-1).
Wiring to the
SLG U92 with
RS 422
Parameterizing
the ASM 480
Interfaces
6-34 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Interfaces
7-1
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Accessories 7
7-2 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
7.1 Software MOBY U
The ”MOBY Software” product is delivered on CD. It contains all the func-
tion blocks, drivers, and documentation for the MOBY system.
After the CD has started, the basic menu appears, containing the possible
data sources:
Figure 7-1 “Software MOBY” V3.6 basic menu
A
ccessories
7-3
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The relevant software components for MOBY U are specified below together
with the function path under which they are listed on the CD:
FC 45 under FC for S7
SIMATIC S7 function for ASM 452/473/475
FC 46 under FC for S7
SIMATIC S7 function for ASM 452
FC 56 under FC for S7
SIMATIC S7 function for ASM 452/473/475
MOBY API1under PC Support
MOBY API application interface with the 3964R driver for
Windows 98/2000/NT 4.0
MOBY documentation under Docu
Current version of the MOBY documentation in PDF format
S7 Object Manager under FC for S7
Installation program and Object Manager for the ASM 473 and ASM 475
interface modules
Test and demo programs under Demo
Test and demo programs for PCs with Windows 98/2000/NT 4.0
News under News
Changes and additions to each software version since the previous version
Note
on MOBY software and licensing
When you purchase an ASM or SLG interface module, this does not include
software or documentation. The “MOBY Software” CD-ROM, which con-
tains all the FBs/FCs available for SIMATIC, C libraries for Windows
98/2000/NT, demo programs and so on must be ordered separately. In
addition, the CD-ROM contains the complete MOBY documentation (in
German and English at least) in PDF format.
When you purchase an ASM or SLG interface module, the price for use of
the software including documentation on the ”MOBY Software” CD-ROM is
included. The purchaser obtains the right to make copies (duplication li-
cense) as needed for customer applications or system development for the
plant.
In addition, the enclosed contract is valid for the use of software prod-
ucts against a one-time payment.
Table 7-1 Ordering data for MOBY Software
Order No.
MOBY Software 6GT2 080-2AA10
1 The application interface with the TCP/IP driver is available with the MOBY software, version > V3.6.
Ordering data
A
ccessories
7-4 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
7.2 MOBY Wide-Range Power Pack
The MOBY wide-range power pack is a compact, primary-pulsed power
supply, designed for use on single-phase, alternating current networks with
two DC outputs (socket connector, circuited in parallel).
The robust physical construction is comprised of an aluminum housing which
gives the finely adjusted system a good blend of physical strength, protection
against electromagnetic interference and optimum heat dissipation.
The primary-pulsed power supply is protected against overload with a built-
in power limitation circuit and is permanently short-circuit proof.
The overvoltage fuse (SIOV) integrated as standard protects the electronics
from excessively high voltages.Two SLG U92s can be directly connected to
the MOBY wide-range power pack. You will also need the connecting cable
6GT2 591-1C...
(see Section 3.7.3).
Figure 7-2 MOBY Wide-Range Power Pack
Table 7-2 Ordering data for MOBY wide-range power pack
Order No.
MOBY wide-range power pack,
AC 100 - 230 V/DC 24 V/2.2 A; incl. 2 mating
connectors for the output voltage
Accessory:
24 V stub line for SLG U92 with RS 232;
length 5 m; extension for 6GT2 591-1C...
6GT2 494-0AA00
6GT2 491-1HH50
Description
Ordering data
A
ccessories
7-5
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 7-3 Technical data of the MOBY wide-range power pack
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Input
Input voltage
Nominal value
Range
Frequency
Input current
Efficiency
Power connection
Power failure bypass
Undervoltage switchoff
Overvoltage protection
100 - 230 VAC
90 - 253 VAC
50/60 Hz
0.85 - 0.45 A
w 80 % at full load
2-m power line with ground-pro-
tected connector
w 10 msec
Yes
SIOV
Output
Nominal output voltage
Nominal output current
Residual ripple
Startup current limitation
Permanent short-circuit proof
Socket contacts
24 VDC
2.2 A
20 mVss to 160 kHz
50 mVss > 160 kHz
NTC
Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transportation and storage
Cooling
-20 C to +40 C
(max. +60 C; see Notes on sa-
fety)
-40 C to +80 C
Convection
General information
Dimensions of power supply incl. mounting
plate,
(L x W x H) in mm
Weight
Color
205 x 80 x 60
(without connectors)
Approx. 1000 g
Anthracite
Electromagnetic compatibility
Interference emission (EN 50081-1)
Interference immunity (EN 50082-2)
Class B in accordance with
EN 55022
EN 61000-4-2
Safety
Certifications
Electrical safety test
Potential isolation, primary/secondary
Protection class
Degree of protection
CE, GS
EN 60950/VDE 0805 and
VDE 106 (part 1)
4 kVAC
I, in accordance with EN 60950
(VDE 0805)
IP65, in accordance with EN
60529 (only when installed)
Technical data
A
ccessories
7-6 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
2
3
1
4
Outputs 1 and 2:
Socket 1: ground (0 V)
Socket 2: +24 V DC
Socket 3: +24 V DC
Socket 4: ground (0 V)
Figure 7-3 Connector allocation of 24 V output
80
7.5 65
190
7.5
176
205
573
5 5
Figure 7-4 Dimensions of MOBY wide-range power pack
Connector alloca-
tion of 24 V output
Dimensions (in
mm)
A
ccessories
7-7
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
!Caution
Do not open the devices or modify them.
Failure to adhere will invalidate the CE and the manufacturer’s warranty.
Applicable DIN/VDE regulations or country-specific specifications must be
observed when installing the power pack.
The application area of the power pack is limited to “information technology
of electrical office equipment” as stated in the standard
EN 60950/VDE 0805.
Devices may only be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel.
For the purposes of this manual, qualified personnel are persons who are
authorized to commission, ground and tag devices, systems and electrical
circuits in accordance with safety standards. The device may only be used
for the applications described in the catalog and the technical description
and then only with Siemens devices and components or devices or compo-
nents of other manufacturers recommended by Siemens.
Correct operation of the product is dependent on correct storage, setup and
installation as well as careful use and maintenance.
During installation, make sure that sufficient space is available so that the
electrical output can be accessed.
The housing may heat up during operation to up to +40 °C. This is no cause
for worry. However, make sure that the power pack is covered when the am-
bient temperature exceeds +40 °C to prevent people from touching the ex-
cessively hot housing. The power pack must also have sufficient ventilation.
Notes on safety
A
ccessories
7-8 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
7.3 MOBY STG U Hand-Held Terminal
The STG U adds to the MOBY U identification system a powerful mobile
hand-held terminal (on the basis of the PSION Workabout mx) for applica-
tions worldwide in the areas of the automotive industry, industrial production
facilities, transportation, logistics and service. It is also an indispensable aid
for commissioning and testing.
The STG U mobile hand-held terminal rounds off the MOBY U range. The
service and test program included in the device makes it easy to read and
write all MOBY U data memories.
It is also very easy for customers to program their own application on the
hand-held terminal. A C library is available as an option from Siemens for
programming customer-specific interactive forms. As a result it is easy to
implement applications in the field of manual data acquisition in Ethernet
networks with the TCP/IP protocol, above all in the automotive industry and
in industrial production facilities, but also in transportation and logistics.
Figure 7-5 MOBY STG U hand-held terminal
Application area
A
ccessories
7-9
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
As a complete unit, the STG U mobile hand-held terminal consists of:
The PSION Workabout (control unit) and
the MOBY U antenna, in which the actual antenna with the associated
read/write electronics is integrated and which serves as the holder for the
PSION Workabout (communications unit).
The MOBY software supplied with the device (memory card) provides ser-
vice and test functions for reading, writing, etc. of all MOBY U data memo-
ries:
Read data from the MDS
Write data to the MDS
Erase the entire data memory (write with a filler value)
Read and display the status of the MDS
Read the MDS ID number
Read the OTP memory
Write to the OTP memory
Present and edit the data in hexadecimal or ASCII format
Enable/disable password protection
Using the optional C library as a basis, it is very easy to program your own
applications including a customized screen user interface for reading and
writing data memories. Various development tools are available for the PC,
and a large selection of accessories is available directly from PSION.
(See http://www.psion.com/industrial/ on the Internet)
3link adapter cable to the PC for easy exchange of data between PC and
PSION Workaboutmx
PSION Workaboutmx basic device with large function keys and numeric
keyboard
Additional memory card with up to 8 Mbytes of memory
Docking station including high-speed charging device and software for
convenient data exchange between PSION Workaboutmx and PC.
Setup and
functions
Optional
components
A
ccessories
7-10 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The following prerequisites must be met when the library for SIBO ’C’ is
used (SIBO ’C’ is the C developmental environment for the PSION Worka-
bout):
PC The ’C development package for the
PSION Workabout’ must be installed on the PC.
This development package is available directly from
PSION
(see: http://www.psion.com/industrial/).
Hand-held terminal PSION Workabout with wall bracket and power
pack. Use of the STG U MOBY hand-held terminal
is recommended.
PC cable You will need a 3link adapter cable from PSION
for the connection to the PC
(see: http://www.psion.com/industrial/). The cable
is only required if it is not already included with the
C development package.
C Library The following files are required: MOBY_U.H,
MOBY_STG.LIB. These are supplied with the
MOBY SIBO ‘C’ library from Siemens.
Note
In principle, applications can also be developed in the Basic programming
language OVAL. However, you cannot use the MOBY library.
System
prerequisites
A
ccessories
7-11
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The illustration below shows the main hardware interfaces which you can use
to write your own applications.
ASCII keyboard, shift and special function
keys (Ctrl, )
Control keys; contrast; display illumination;
on/off; cursor keys
Additional Flash memory cards for storing
large amounts of data
RS 232 interface
(connection of the MOBY U antenna)
Graphical LCD screen
LIF interface for connection of
PC, printer, etc.
Numeric input block with Enter key
Green LED: on when battery is being
charged
Figure 7-6 Hardware configuration of the STG U
Hardware
A
ccessories
7-12 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 7-4 Ordering data for the STG U
STG U mobile hand-held terminal
Basic device (PSION Workaboutmx)
with MOBY U antenna, batteries,
standard software incl. STG functions on
EEPROM card, user’s guide, without
STG U power pack
STG U power pack
90 V to 264 V AC wide-range power pack with
cable switch for
the MOBY U antenna and
the control unit (PSION Workaboutmx)
and charging adapter for the control unit
6GT2 503-0AA00
6GT2 503-1DA00
Accessories:
MOBY U antenna
Read/write antenna with the electronics and hol-
der for the control unit (PSION Workaboutmx)
with battery
Memory card with STG software and filehandler
software for MOBY D, MOBY E, MOBY F,
MOBY I and MOBY U,
incl. user’s guide
C library for MOBY D, MOBY E, MOBY F,
MOBY I and MOBY U for development of cu-
stomer-specific screen dialogs, without develop-
ment tools, incl. description
6GT2 503-1AA00
6GT2 303-1CA00
6GT2 381-1AB00
Replacement battery
for PSION Workaboutmx
2 size AA NiCd batteries (2.4 V 850 mAh)
Replacement battery
for the STG U antenna
LiIon battery pack (7.2 V 1.8 Ah)
Optional components for PSION
Additional PSION components
(e.g. 3link cable, C developmental environment)
6GT2 094-0AB00
6GT2 594-0AB00
Obtain from local dealer or PSION
(http://www.psion.com/industrial/)
Table 7-5 Technical data of the STG U hand-held terminal
Hardware
Processor NEC V30mx 27.68 MHz (80C86-compatible)
RAM 2 MB; of which approx. 1.8 MB is freely availa-
ble
ROM 2 MB for operating system
User program 1 MB (with MOBY service and test program)
Screen Graphic LCD screen with 240x100 pixels, gray-
step scale and switch-on background lighting
Keyboard Alphanumeric with 57 keys
Sound Piezo signal encoder
Ordering data
Technical data
A
ccessories
7-13
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 7-5 Technical data of the STG U hand-held terminal
Power supply NiCd rechargeable battery pack with 2 size AA
cells (850 mAh), suitable for high-speed rechar-
ging, automatic switch-off
Operating time: 20 hours
Antenna inactive,
display unlit
18 hours
Antenna active,
display unlit
10 hours
Antenna inactive,
display lit
Backup battery: 3 V lithium cell CR 1620
Interfaces
LIF interface (Low
Insertion Force interface)
RS232 AT
RS232 TTL
Interface for battery charging and communication
with PC and printer (3link cable not included)
RS232 AT interface for connection to the
MOBY U antenna
RS 232 TTL interface (not used on the STG U)
Security Locking mechanism for battery and program me-
mory
Software
Operating system EPOC/16 multitasking, graphics support, GUI,
Interpreter similar to MS-DOS
File management MS-DOS-compatible
Integrated software MOBY service and test program; spreadsheet;
database; pocket calculator; communication
MOBY STG program Normal addressing functions:
Read, write, delete and copy MDS data
Read MDS ID, save and load MDS data
Menus in German or English
Entry and display of data in ASCII or HEX
Technical data
Dimensions [L x W x H] in mm 189 x 92 x 35
Weight, approx. 325 g (incl. batteries)
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
–20 °C to +60°C
–25 °C to +70 °C (without battery)
Relative humidity 0% to 90% no condensation
Degree of protection in accor-
dance with EN 60529
IP54 (splash-proof)
Impact resistance Max. height of fall onto concrete on all sides up to
1 m (without MOBY U antenna)
A
ccessories
7-14 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 7-5 Technical data of the STG U hand-held terminal
Certifications Safety standard (Europe): EN 60950
Emission (Europe): EN 55022 Class B
Emission (USA): FCC Part 15 Class B
Electrostatics: Conforms to
IEC801-2
RF immunity: Conforms to
IEC801-3
EFT immunity: Conforms to
IEC801-4
MOBY U antenna
Transmission frequency 2.4 to 2.4835 GHz
Band width 2 x 1 MHz within 83 MHz
Gross bit rate of radio channel 384 kbit/sec
Data rate (write/read) (net) approx. 8 / 4.8 Kbyte/s without bunch
Antenna
Direction of radiation
Angle of opening
Polarization
Emission
Emission density
Perpendicular to rear of MOBY U antenna
Approx. 70° (conical antenna field)
Circular
< 50 mV/m at a distance of 3 m
< 0.5 µW/cm2 at distance of 1 m
Distance (read/write)
Limit distance (Sg)
Max. / min. / default
Location resolution
0.15 m to 3 m
Identical to set distance limit
3 m / 0.5 m / 1 m
Range limitation, adjustable in 0.5 m increments
MDS recording time Approx. 3 s with 1 MDS
(after actuation of communication button)
Power supply LiIon battery pack 2SIP CGR18650 HG 7.2 V
1.8 Ah
Suitable for high-speed recharging, automatic
switch-off,
Service life approx. 500 charging cycles
Current consumption (antenna
on)
< 800 mA
Operating time 1> 2 months (antenna not active)
2 hours (antenna active)
The antenna is activated using the communication
button for communication only, and is automati-
cally switched off after the function has been ex-
ecuted. The shortest on-time for a communication
operation is approx. 3 s (depending on the vo-
lume of data) when an MDS is located in the
field.
A
ccessories
7-15
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 7-5 Technical data of the STG U hand-held terminal
Operating modes
OFF
search
Communication
Antenna off
Ready to receive and evaluate search information
sent from the MDS.
Communication with the MDS: write, read or in-
itialize
Minimum distance to an
SLG U92 or another STG U
≥ (set range + 0.5 m)
Serial interface to the
PSION
Transmission speed
Transmission protocol
RS 232
115.200 Baud
3964 R
Interface for battery charging
Voltage / current
Charging time
4-pin socket for connecting the STG U power
pack
12 V DC / 1.225 A
> 1.5 h: LiIon battery pack 2SIP CGR18650 HG
Operating element Communication button (for starting communica-
tion)
LEDs 2 LEDs
LED for battery charging
– lit
– not lit
Power pack connected
red: Device faulty
yellow: Batteries being charged
green: Batteries charged
Power pack not connected
LED for communication
– lit
– not lit
Communication button pressed and communica-
tion not terminated
red: Insufficient battery capacity for
communication
yellow: Antenna switched to active
Ready to identify an MDS
or identify an MDS
and communicate with it.
Communication terminated or not yet started.
Housing
Dimensions
(L x W x H in mm)
Color/material
282 x 235 x 93
Black / VALOX357X
A
ccessories
7-16 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table 7-5 Technical data of the STG U hand-held terminal
Certifications RF: EN 330440-2
SAR: EN 50371
Safety: EN 60950-1
EMC: EN 301489-01
EN 301489-03
ENV 50204
FCC Part 15C (USA)
UL under preparation
Safe for pacemakers
1 The operating time corresponds to the time that the antenna is switched on; this means for each
MDS function the time from the actuation of the communication button to the completion or ab-
ortion of the selected MDS function. If after pressing the communication button you have not
pointed or do not point the hand-held terminal at an MDS, the function is aborted after 30 se-
conds. The antenna is switched on during this time.
STG U power pack with cable switch (on charging cable) and char-
ging adapter for PSION Workabout
Input voltage range 90 V to 264 V AC
Input voltage frequency range 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Nominal input current 400 mA
Nominal output voltage 12 VDC
Nominal output current 1.25 A
Base load None
Short-circuit proof Yes
Electrical isolation
primary/secondary
3 kV AC
Dimensions of power pack
(L x W x H in mm)
87.5 x 51.5 x 34 (without connector)
Color/material Black / plastic (PPE-V1)
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transport and storage
0 °C to +40 °C
–40 °C to +70 °C
Relative humidity 0 % to 90 %, no condensation
Degree of protection in accor-
dance with EN 60529
IP40
Weight, approx. 250 g
Charging cable 2 x 0.5 mm2 / 2 m long
Primary connector Replaceable
EU, UK, USA and ROW connector
(EU connector included in scope of delivery)
Certifications 220 V to 240 V (Europe): CE
120 V (Canada and USA): CULUS
Safety: EN 60950
EMC: EN 55011,
EN 55014 and
EN 55022 Class B
A
ccessories
A-1
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Documentation
Table A-1 Ordering data for descriptions
Order No.
Description of FC 45
German
English
6GT2 097-3AM00-0DA1
6GT2 097-3AM00-0DA2
Description of FC 46
German
English
6GT2 097-3AC40-0DA1
6GT2 097-3AC40-0DA2
Description of FC 56
German
English
On MOBY Software CD
Description of 3964 R for
Win 95/NT (German/English)
On MOBY Software CD
Description of MOBY API On MOBY Software CD
Descriptions,
bound
A
A-2 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Documentation
B-1
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Error Messages
This chapter gives you the error messages of MOBY U. The messages are
divided into two groups.
B.1 Error messages and causes in MOBY U with ASM and FC 45
(direct MDS addressing)
B.2 Error messages and causes in MOBY U with ASM 452 and FC 46
(filehandler)
B.3 Error messages and causes in MOBY U with ASM and FC 56
(filehandler)
B
B-2 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
B.1 Error messages and causes in MOBY U with ASM and
FC 45 (direct MDS addressing)
B.1.1 General Errors
OB 86 not programmed and a slave has failed.
OB122 not programmed and a slave has failed.
The error only occurs when FC 45 is called.
The pointers Params_DB, command_DB, and DAT_DB are not present or
indicate an unavailable address area.
B.1.2 Error Messages
There will always be an error status in FC 45 if the “error” variable is set for
a channel. If this is the case, the exact cause of the error can be established in
the “error_MOBY”, “error_FC”, or “error_BUS” variables.
Table B-1 Classification of the error messages
Error variable Classification
error_MOBY This error is reported by the MOBY ASM/SLG.
There are two main causes:
There are communication errors between the ASM and SLG or between the SLG and MDS.
The ASM/SLG cannot process the command.
error_MOBY is displayed on the ASM with a flashing ERR LED.
error_FC FC 45 reports this error.
Main cause
The parameter assignment of “Params_DB” or “command_DB” is incorrect.
error_BUS The transport layer of PROFIBUS reports an error. It is very helpful to use a PROFIBUS tracer and a
PROFIBUS tester (BT 200; order number 6ES7 181-0AA00-0AA0) to find and analyze the error. The
system diagnostics of PROFIBUS can provide further information on the cause of the error. The error
indicated here is reported by the SFC 58/59 system function in the RET_VAL parameter. You will find
a detailed description of the RET_VAL parameter in the SIMATIC S7 system manuals (see the
S7-300/400 system software).
Note
If several errors occur in succession in the case of chained commands, the
error variable will always show the first error detected.
Programmable
controller goes
into STOP mode
Error Messa
g
es
B-3
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-2 Error messages of the MOBY ASM/SLG via the error_MOBY variable
Error
Code in
Hex
ERR LED
flashes
Cause, Remedy
00 – Not an error; result is OK
– 1x See error code 0F.
01 2x Presence error: MDS has moved out of the transmission window of the SLG. The
MOBY command was only partially executed.
Read command: No data are supplied to FC 45.
Write command: The data memory that has just left the field has
an incomplete data record.
→Working distance from the SLG to the MDS is not adhered to.
→Configuration error: data block to be processed is too large
(for dynamic operation)
The next command (READ, WRITE) automatically applies to the next MDS.
Note:
The error indication with the red LED on the front plate shows error code 02 this time.
02 2x Presence error:
→A mobile data memory moved past the SLG but was not processed by a command.
→A pending MDS command was aborted by an ”antenna off” command.
Note:
The red error LED showing the errors does not distinguish between error 01 and error 02
(see error code 01).
03 3x Error in the connection to the SLG
→Voltage of the ASM < 20 V or ASM not connected
→24 V voltage has voltage dips or is not connected or switched off
→Fuse on the ASM has blown. Check wiring
→Cable between ASM and SLG incorrectly wired or cable break
→Hardware defective: ASM or SLG
→Interference coupling on the SLG cable or bus cable
→Run init_run after error has been eliminated
04 4x Error in memory of MDS
The data memory has never been written or has lost its contents due to battery failure.
→Initialize data memory with the STG
→With the SLG: call initialization command
→Check battery of MDS or change MDS
→Data memory is defective
05 5x Unknown command code in byte 2 of the message frame
SLG reports error in data length (check message frame)
→Incorrect length of user data
06 6x Field interference on SLG
The SLG is receiving interference from its surroundings.
→MDS left the field during communication
→Communication between SLG and MDS terminated due to
external interference
→Distance between two SLGs is too small and does not adhere to configuration
guidelines
0B 11x Memory of the MDS cannot be correctly read
error_MOBY
Error Messa
g
es
B-4 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-2 Error messages of the MOBY ASM/SLG via the error_MOBY variable
Error
Code in
Hex
Cause, RemedyERR LED
flashes
0C 12x Memory of the MDS cannot be written.
→Memory of the MDS is defective
0D 13x Address error (address area exceeded)
→Specified address does not exist on the MDS
→Check and correct command for message format
→MDS is the wrong type.
0F 15x Startup message
The ASM sends this message after every startup. (A startup occurs each time the voltage
is applied, each time the front switch is activated, after a reset via connector X1 or after a
bus error.) The startup message remains queued until the user sends a RESET command
to the ASM. This gives the user a chance to know when power returns to the ASM (i.e.,
ASM is ready again).
→Perform init_run.
10 16x NEXT command is not possible.
→SLG does not know NEXT command
11 17x Short circuit or overload of the 24 V outputs
Next command must be a RESET command.
→The affected output is switched off
→All the 24 V outputs are switched off in the event of a total overload
→A reset can only be performed by switching the power off and on again
→Then start init_run
12 18x Internal ASM communication error
→Connector contact problem on the ASM (send ASM away for repair)
→Hardware of ASM defective
→EMC interference
→Start init_run after error has been eliminated
13 19x There isn’t enough buffer storage space in the ASM/SLG to store the command tempora-
rily
14 20x Internal ASM error or SLG error (watchdog)
→Program execution error on the ASM
→Switch the 24 V power off and on again
→Program execution error on the SLG
→Start init_run after error has been eliminated
15 21x Incorrect parameter assignment of the ASM/SLG
→Check INPUT parameter in UDT 10
→RESET command incorrectly parameterized
→The ASM hasn’t received init_run after power-up
16 22x The command cannot be executed with the current bus configuration.
→Input or output areas are too small for the frame length
Correct DDB file used?
→Write or read command too long.
Data length u 233 bytes.
→Adapt bus configuration on the master module.
Error Messa
g
es
B-5
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-2 Error messages of the MOBY ASM/SLG via the error_MOBY variable
Error
Code in
Hex
Cause, RemedyERR LED
flashes
17 23x Communication error between FC 45 and MOBY ASM
Handshake error
→Params_DB (UDT 10) in this ASM station is overwritten
by other program sections
→Check the parameter assignment of the MOBY ASM in UDT 10
→Check the FC 45 command that results in this error
→Start init_run after error has been eliminated
18 24x An error has occurred that has to be acknowledged with init_run
→A temporary short circuit has occurred on PROFIBUS
→The RESET command is invalid
→Start init_run after error has been eliminated
19 25x The previous command is active or there is a buffer overflow
The user sent a new command to the ASM/SLG although the last command was still
active.
→The active command can only be terminated with init_run
→Before the start of a new command the READY bit must = 1;
exception init_run
→Two FC 45 calls were parameterized with the same parameters: “ASM_address” and
“ASM_channel”
→Two FC 45 calls are working with the same Params_DB pointer
→Start init_run after error has been eliminated
→No data has been picked up by the MDS whilst working with command repetition
(e.g. fixed-code MDS). The data buffer in the ASM has overflowed. MDS data have
been lost.
1A 26x PROFIBUS DP error occurred
→PROFIBUS DP bus connection was interrupted
→Wire break on the bus
→Bus connector on the ASM temporarily removed
→PROFIBUS DP master no longer addresses the ASM
→Perform init_run.
→The ASM has detected a message frame interruption on the bus.
The PROFIBUS may have been reconfigured (with HWCONFIG, for example).
This error is only displayed if response monitoring was
activated at PROFIBUS configuration.
1 C 28x The antenna of the SLG is off/on and is to be switched off/on again.
The antenna is off and a MDS command is to be executed in this state. The antenna is to
be switched off although an MDS command is pending.
→Antenna is off.
→Antenna is on.
→Mode in SET-ANT command is unknown.
→Antenna is off. The MDS command cannot be executed.
1D 29x There are more MDSs in the transmission window than the SLG can process simulta-
neously.
→Only one MDS can be processed at any one time with FC 45
Error Messa
g
es
B-6 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-2 Error messages of the MOBY ASM/SLG via the error_MOBY variable
Error
Code in
Hex
Cause, RemedyERR LED
flashes
1E 30x Errors during the processing of the function
→The data in the UDT 10 is errored; check UDT 10 and run init_run
→ASM hardware defective: on init_run the ASM receives incorrect data
→QB byte does not correspond to user data length.
1F 31x The current command terminated with RESET (init_run or cancel) or the bus connector
was removed
→Communication with the MDS was terminated with init_run
→This error can only be returned with init_run or cancel
Error Messa
g
es
B-7
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-3 ”error_FC” error variable
Error code
(B#16#..)
Description
00 Not an error; default value if everything is OK
01 Params_DB does not exist on the SIMATIC.
02 Params_DB is too small.
→UDT 10/11 was not used in the definition.
→Params_DB must be 300 bytes long (for each channel).
→Check Params_DB, Params_ADDR for correctness.
03 The DB after the “command_DB_number” pointer does not exist on the SIMATIC.
04 “Command_DB” on SIMATIC is too small.
→UDT 20/21 was not used in the command definition.
→The last command in “command_DB” is a chained command; reset the chaining bit
05 Invalid type of command
→Check the command_DB_number/command_DB_address command pointer
→Check the current values in command_DB
→Perform init_run.
06 The received acknowledgment is not the expected acknowledgment. The parameters of the com-
mand and acknowledgment message frames do not match (command, length, address_MDS).
→The user changed the command_DB_number/-_address pointer while the command was
being processed.
→The user changed the command parameters in the MOBY CMD data block (UDT 20) while
the command was being processed.
→Check the parameter assignment of ASM_address and ASM_channel. ASM_address
and ASM_channel have the same parameter assignment for different channels.
→Acknowledgment and command counters between the ASM and FC are no longer
synchronous
→Perform init_run.
07 The parameter MOBY_mode or MDS_control (defined in UDT 10) has an impermissible value.
08 A bus error has occurred which was reported by the system functions SFC 58/59. More informa-
tion on the error is available in the error_Bus variable.
→ASM_address or ASM_channel not present
→Perform init_run.
09 The ASM has failed.
→Power failure on MOBY ASM
→PROFIBUS connector pulled or PROFIBUS cable broken
→ASM_address or ASM_channel not present
The error is indicated when the ASM_Failure bit was set in OB 122. OB 122 is called when the
FC 45 can no longer access the cyclic word for the MOBY ASM.
0A The user started another init_run without waiting for ready while the first init_run command was
still being processed.
→Do not set init_run cyclically
→The same physical ASM channel is used in two (or more) UDT 10 structures.
Check the ASM_address and ASM_channel in all UDT 10 structures.
error_FC
Error Messa
g
es
B-8 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-3 ”error_FC” error variable
Error code
(B#16#..)
Description
0B init_run cannot be executed; cyclic process image for ASM is faulty; FC 45 reports timeout of the
process image to the ASM
This error can be eliminated by writing the value #00 to the address DBB 58 in UDT 10. Howe-
ver, in certain error situations, the FC 45s do not generate an error message, and they then hang.
→ASM_address in UDT 10 is parameterized incorrectly. ASM_address may be on the wrong
module.
→ASM_channel is parameterized with w16 or v0
→ASM hardware/firmware is defective.
→The same physical ASM channel is used in two (or more) UDT 10 structures.
Check the ASM_address and ASM_channel in all UDT 10 structures.
0C Range length area in block move of FC 45.
→DAT_DB does not exist or is too small. Check DAT_DB_number and
DAT_DB_address in UDT 20.
→Perform init_run.
0D An init_run was not correctly terminated. The process image is not consistent.
→Execute init_run again
→Switch ASM off and on again
→The RUN-STOP switch was operated rapidly several times on the CPU (particularly
in the case of slow PROFIBUS transmission rates)
→The same physical ASM channel is used in two (or more) UDT 10 structures.
Check the ASM_address and ASM_channel in all UDT 10 structures.
Error Messa
g
es
B-9
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-4 ”error_Bus” error variable
Error code
(W#16#...)
Description
800A ASM is not ready (temporary message).
→This message is sent to a user who is not using FC 45 and queries the ASM acyclically in
very rapid succession.
8x7F Internal error in parameter x. Cannot be corrected by the user.
8x22
8x23
Area length error while reading a parameter
Area length error while writing a parameter
This error code indicates that the parameter x is completely or partially outside the operand range
or the length of a bit field for an ANY parameter is not divisible by 8.
8x24
8x25
Area error while reading a parameter
Area error while writing a parameter
This error code indicates that the parameter x is located in an area that is impermissible for the
system function.
8x26 The parameter contains number of a time cell which is too large.
8x27 The parameter contains number of a counter cell which is too large.
8x28
8x29
Direction error while reading a parameter
Direction error while writing a parameter
The reference to parameter x is an operand whose bit address is not 0.
8x30
8x31
The parameter is located in the write-protected global DB.
The parameter is located in the write-protected instance DB.
8x32
8x34
8x35
The parameter has a DB number that is too large.
The parameter has an FC number that is too large.
The parameter has an FB number that is too large.
8x3A
8x3C
8x3E
The parameter has the number of a DB which is not loaded.
The parameter has the number of an FC which is not loaded.
The parameter has the number of an FB which is not loaded.
8x42
8x43
An access error occurred while the system was trying to read a parameter from the I/O area of the
inputs.
An access error occurred while the system was trying to write a parameter to the I/O area of the
outputs.
8x44
8x45
Error during nth (n > 1) read access after an error occurred
Error during nth (n > 1) write access after an error occurred
8090 Specified logical base address invalid: there is no assignment in the SDB1/SDB2x, or it is not a
base address.
8092 A type other than BYTE was specified in an ANY reference.
8093 The area identifier obtained when the logical address was configured (SDB1, SDB2x) is not per-
mitted for these SFCs. Permissible are:
0 = S7-400
1 = S7-300
2, 7 = DP modules
error_BUS
Error Messa
g
es
B-10 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-4 ”error_Bus” error variable
Error code
(W#16#...)
Description
80A0 Negative acknowledgement while reading the module; FC picks up acknowledgment although no
acknowledgment is ready to be picked up
A user not working with FC 45 would like to pick up DS 101 (or DS 102 to DS 104) but there is
no acknowledgment available.
→Execute init_run for a resynchronization between the ASM and application
80A1 Negative acknowledgement while writing to the module; FC sends command although the ASM
cannot receive a command
80A2 DP protocol error for layer 2, possible hardware defect.
80A3 DP protocol error with direct-data-link-mapper or user interface/user, possible hardware error.
80B0 SFC not possible for this type of module.
Module does not know the data record.
Data record number w 241 is not permissible
Data records 0 and 1 are not permissible with SFC58 “WR_REC”.
80B1 The length specified in the RECORD parameter is wrong.
80B2 The configured slot is not occupied.
80B3 The actual module type is not the required module type in SDB1
80C0 RDREC:
The module has the data record but no read data have arrived yet.
WRREC:
The ASM is not ready to receive new data
→Wait for the cyclic counter to count up
80C1 The data of the preceding write job on the module for the same data record have not yet been pro-
cessed by the module.
80C2 The module is processing the maximum possible number of jobs for one CPU.
80C3 Required resources (memory, etc.) are busy at the moment.
This error is not reported by FC 45. In the event of this error, FC 45 waits until the resources are
made available again by the system.
80C4 Communication error
Parity error
SW ready not set
Error in block length management
Checksum error on CPU side
Checksum error on module side
80C5 Distributed I/O not available.
Error Messa
g
es
B-11
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
B.2 Error messages and Causes when MOBY U Is Used with
ASM 452 and FC 46 (Filehandler)
B.2.1 PROFIBUS diagnosis
If the “ON” LED does not illuminate, there is either no supply voltage or
insufficient supply voltage to the ASM. The possible causes are a defective
fuse, no supply voltage, or insufficient supply voltage. A flashing LED or one
that does not come on may indicate a defective module.
The following table lists possible error displays and tells you want they mean
and what to do.
Table B-5 LED displays
”BF”
LED
”SF”
LED
Cause of the error Error handling
On * ASM is starting up –
The connection to the DP master
has failed.
ASM cannot detect a transmission
rate.
Check the PROFIBUS DP connection.
Check the DP master.
Bus interruption
DP master not working
Check all the cables in your PROFIBUS DP net-
work.
Check whether the PROFIBUS DP connector is
securely attached to the ASM.
Off On The PROFIBUS address set on the
ASM is not permissible.
Change the PROFIBUS address set in the ASM.
Flashes On The configuration data
sent from the DP master to the
ASM do not match the configura-
tion of the ASM.
Check the configuration of the ASM
(input/output, PROFIBUS address).
Correct DDB file used?
Check switch 8 on the ASM.
Flashes Off ASM has detected the transmission
rate but is not addressed by the DP
master.
ASM not (correctly) configured.
Check the PROFIBUS address set in the ASM/
the configuration software.
Check the configuration of the ASM
(station type).
Check the bus parameters. The PROFIBUS DP
default values must be changed.
On Flashes There is a hardware fault in the
ASM.
Replace the ASM.
* Status is not relevant
LED “ON” does
not illuminate or
flashes
Diagnostics with
LEDs
Error Messa
g
es
B-12 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
The ASM 452 supports the standard PROFIBUS system diagnosis with a
length of 6 bytes.
B.2.2 Evaluation of the ERR LED
Filehandler errors that point to defective hardware in the ASM, SLG, or MDS
are indicated by a flashing ERR LED.
Table B-6 Evaluation of the ERR LED
ERR LED
flashes
Filehandler error message
1x
2x
3x
4x
5x
6x
7x
8x
9x
10x
11x
12x
13x
14x
15x
18x
20x
21x
30x
D0 01 Only RESET command permissible
C0 06 Presence error
B0 01 Error in connection to the SLG
C0 02 Error in the RAM of the MDS
C0 07 Parameter assignment error for TRACE or FORMAT/command cannot be interpreted
C0 08 Too many synchronization attempts
C0 09 Too many transmission errors
C0 10 CRC transmission error
C0 11 FORMAT, CRC error during reception
C0 12 FORMAT, MDS cannot be initialized
C0 13 FORMAT, timeout
C0 14 FORMAT, not initialized
C0 15 CMD address error
C0 16 ECC error
C0 17 General driver error
– – – – Internal ASM communication error
³Hardware is defective
³Restart
– – – – Internal ASM overflow; stack overflow; SPC memory overflow; diagnosis not working
³Execute RESET or restart
³Switch interface module off and on
³Check bus parameterization
– – – – Incorrect parameter assignment of the ASM
³Check the parameter assignment in HWCONFIG
– – – – Corrupt message frame from SLG
System diagno-
stics
Error Messa
g
es
B-13
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
B.2.3 Filehandler Error Messages
Table B-7 Evaluation of ANZ0 and ANZ1 error displays
Error code
(W#16#...)
Description
A0 03 The recipient ID of the started command is not permissible.
A0 06 The command ID (KK) of the started command is not permissible (not defined). The correct com-
mand ID must be specified.
A0 07 The command index (KI) of the started command is not permissible. The correct KI must be spe-
cified.
A0 11 The message frame control parameters (DBN or KK) are not in the correct sequence. Two or more
message frames are written to the same ASM. The parameter assignment of the FC call parameter
“ADR” must be checked.
Do not execute the start of the command by means of the variable control function
A0 16 The filehandler is currently processing another command. It is imperative that a RESET command
be executed.
A0 17 The data block of the SLG is too long and cannot be transferred via PROFIBUS.
The block length parameter is too big for the RESET command (FC error or user error)
Program execution error in the SLG
Restart the ASM and the command
A0 18 Communication error; MOBY driver is active while a new command is sent
Check the command sequences in the application
Restart the ASM
B0 01 Error in the connection to the SLG:
Cable between ASM and SLG is incorrectly wired or there is a cable break.
24 V power is not connected or switched off.
Circuit breaker on the ASM has tripped
Hardware defective
This error does not occur when the system commands (RESET, NEXT, ASM-STATUS) are star-
ted.
B0 02 EAKO 1:
A command was started but there is no MDS in the transmission window of the SLG.
EAKO 0:
The old/current MDS has left the transmission window and the next/new one has entered the
transmission window. A command has been started (not NEXT). This command applies to the
new MDS, but the old/current MDS has not yet been terminated with NEXT.
A new MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG and leaves it again without a com-
mand being executed with this MDS (MDS slips through).
B0 08 The antenna is not switched on, or SET-ANT = ON with the antenna already on
User error; note the command sequence
B0 09 Buffer overflow in the MOBY driver of the ASM/SLG; system-internal error
Restart the ASM
Evaluation of
ANZ0 and ANZ1
error displays
Error Messa
g
es
B-14 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-7 Evaluation of ANZ0 and ANZ1 error displays
Error code
(W#16#...)
Description
B0 10 Driver error; communication between the filehandler and MDS driver is faulty (QB byte)
Restart the ASM
B0 11 Communication error between the filehandler and MDS driver; the MDS driver reports a canceled
RESET although the filehandler is not processing a RESET
Restart the ASM
B0 12 Unmotivated power-up message of the MDS driver
Restart the ASM
C0 02 The MDS reports a memory error.
The MDS has never been written or its battery failed and it lost its memory (not in the case of the
MDS EEPROM). Then:
Change the MDS (if the battery monitoring bit is set).
Test the MDS by attempting to initialize it with the STG
Format MDS with FORMAT.
C0 06 During certain important processes (e.g. writing the system area of MDS, formatting the MDS),
the MDS must not leave the SLG’s transmission window, since otherwise the command would be
terminated with this error. Then:
Start command again.
The MDS is positioned on the boundary of the SLG’s transmission window.
C0 07 The FORMAT or TRACE commands were sent with the wrong parameters. The physically
addressed address does not exist on the MDS (MDS memory is smaller than specified by the
command).
During READ/WRITE/UPDATE: pointer in FAT is defective; a block is pointed to which
does not exist on the MDS.
C0 08 Field interference on the SLG. The SLG is receiving interference from its surroundings, e.g.,
External interference field; the interference field can be verified with the ”inductive field indi-
cator” of the STG
The distance between two SLGs is too short and does not comply with the configuration
guidelines.
The connection cable to the SLG is defective, too long or does not meet specifications.
C0 09 Too many transmission errors have occurred. The MDS was not able to receive the command or
the write data from the ASM/SLG correctly even after several attempts.
The MDS is positioned directly in the boundary area of the transmission window.
Data transmission to the MDS is being affected by external interference.
C0 10 CRC sending error. The monitor receiving circuit detected an error while sending. Cause of
the error same as for C0 08.
The MDS is reporting CRC errors very often. (MDS is located on the boundary or MDS/SLG
defective.)
C0 11 Same as C0 08.
C0 12 The MDS is unable to execute the FORMAT command. The MDS is defective.
C0 13 When being formatted, the MDS must be located in the transmission window of the SLG. Other-
wise, a timeout error occurs. This means:
The MDS is positioned directly in the boundary area of the transmission window.
The MDS is using too much current (defective).
The MDS EEPROM type is incorrectly parameterized in FORMAT
Error Messa
g
es
B-15
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-7 Evaluation of ANZ0 and ANZ1 error displays
Error code
(W#16#...)
Description
C0 14 The memory of the MDS cannot be written. This means:
The MDS has a smaller memory than that specified in the FORMAT command. The MDS
type must therefore be correctly parameterized.
The memory of the MDS is defective.
The MDS EEPROM has been written too often and has reached the end of its life.
C0 15 Address error. The address area of the MDS has been exceeded.
MDS is the wrong type.
C0 16 An ECC error has occurred. The data cannot be read from the MDS. This means:
MDS data have been lost (MDS defective).
The MDS was not formatted with the ECC driver. Format the MDS again.
The MDS EEPROM has reached the end of its life. The data have been lost. Replace MDS.
The MDS moved out of the field while being written. The MDS is positioned incorrectly.
(Note: the system area of the MDS is automatically written to each SLG station.)
C0 17 The filehandler is not working correctly.
Check the command structure or command sequence.
The hardware of the ASM/SLG (firmware) has a defect
C0 18 Operating system error (AMOS mailbox)
Restart the ASM/SLG
C0 19 There are several MDSs in the field. The number of MDSs in the field is greater than the parame-
terized number of MDSs for “multitag”
Only one MDS can be processed in the field with FC 46.
Remove all the other MDSs from the field
The configuration of the range limit dili (distance_limiting) is set incorrectly
Check the environment of the SLG to see if there is by chance a MDS in the field
C0 20 Communication error between the filehandler and MDS driver; the MOBY driver does not know
the command from the filehandler.
Restart the ASM/SLG
C0 21 Operating system error; watchdog error in the ASM/SLG
Restart the ASM/SLG
D0 01 The filehandler will only accept a RESET command.
Filehandler was not yet initialized with a RESET command.
This state can only be resolved with a RESET command.
D0 05 The FORMAT, CREATE, WRITE, ATTRIB, UPDATE, COVER, QUEUE-READ or
QUEUE-WRITE command has been issued with impermissible parameters.
FORMAT with impermissible MDS name or MDS type
CREATE with impermissible filename
WRITE/UPDATE with length of 0 (DLNG=0)
impermissible attribute
QUEUE-WRITE or QUEUE-READ with impermissible option
COVER with impermissible user (Only 0 or 1 are legal.)
Error Messa
g
es
B-16 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-7 Evaluation of ANZ0 and ANZ1 error displays
Error code
(W#16#...)
Description
D0 07 The system data transferred with the LOAD command are wrong.
– DLNG is parameterized incorrectly for LOAD.
– Wrong data block specified or incorrectly parameterized
– MOVE command not executed correctly; on the MDS, DIR + FAT do not match the
checksum
The MOVE command cannot be executed. The checksum does not match DIR + FAT. The
data memory has evidently exited the transmission window while system operation (writing
DIR + FAT, for example) were being executed.
D0 09 A RESET command has been started by FC 46 with impermissible parameters. The cause of the
error is in the user program.
Check the FC 46 parameter assignment
D0 14 WRITE command:
There is no longer sufficient storage space on the MDS. The data are not written to the MDS in
their entirety.
CREATE command:
When a file is created, a data block can no longer be reserved for this file. No more memory
blocks are free.
D0 15 The MDS could not be identified by the filehandler. Format the MDS again.
D0 18 The logically addressed address is not in the file. The FAT has an error. The MDS must be refor-
matted.
D0 22 The data memory has been locked by means of the COVER command. A write-access command
(e.g., UPDATE, CREATE) would destroy the data memory layout and is thus rejected.
D0 23 COVER command:
The MDS name specified in the command does not agree with the actual MDS name.
D0 24 The wrong MDS ID number has been entered.
The MDS is not present.
E0 01 The type of the MDS before the SLG does not correspond to the ECC mode that is set. The
MDS must be reformatted for the desired ECC mode.
The MDS is not a filehandler MDS; format MDS
E0 02 There are no more directory entries free. The file specified in the CREATE command can no lon-
ger be created.
E0 03 The file specified in the CREATE command already exists in the directory (no duplicated names
permitted).
E0 05 A secondary FAT error was discovered in the READ or WRITE command. The file applica-
tion table (FAT) is defective. The MDS must be reformatted.
Wrong address specified in TRACE command
F0 01 The file addressed by a command (e.g., WRITE) does not exist in the directory. The file must
be created by means of CREATE.
Check file name (possibly not in ASCII format).
On or more files are to be read with QUEUE-READ but they do not exist on the MDS. Valid
data are not transferred to the user.
F0 05 Write access (WRITE, UPDATE, or DELETE) to a file which must not be changed (and is protec-
ted with an appropriate attribute).
Error Messa
g
es
B-17
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-7 Evaluation of ANZ0 and ANZ1 error displays
Error code
(W#16#...)
Description
F0 07 QUEUE-READ: specified file length shorter than file length
F0 08 QUEUE-READ: the skip calculated by the filehandler is larger than 0FFF hex (4095 dec)
H1 01 The FC 46 call parameters or DATDB/DATDW were incorrectly parameterized in the absolute
call.
Change the FC parameters in the calling program and start a RESET command.
H1 02 The length of the loaded BEDB is shorter than 350 data words. This means that the
FC 46 does not have the corresponding space for the FC-internal parameters. A new BEDB with
the appropriate length must be loaded. Then start a RESET command.
H0 03 The command index is impermissible. Change command index.
H0 04 This command identifier and thus also this command is not known to FC 46. Check the command
identifier.
H0 05 The access authorization of the corresponding SLG does not allow this command. For instance, if
the ”R” (read-only) access authorization has been granted to the SLG, a WRITE command cannot
be issued on this SLG. This means that either the FC parameter ”RWD” must be changed (and
then a RESET command started to accept the change) or a permissible command must be started.
H0 06 The WRITE/UPDATE /LOAD/QUEUE-WRITE or QUEUE-READ command parameter speci-
fied in DBW 22 (DLNG) in BEDB is not permissible. Only a user data length of 7FF0 hex
(32752 dec) is permissible or a maximum of 210 decimal bytes for QUEUE-READ. Change
DLNG accordingly.
H1 07 The data block specified in DBW 2 (BEDB) does not exist. The corresponding data block must be
loaded. Then start a RESET command so that the absolute addresses can be calculated.
H1 08 This is a pure software error, which cannot occur during normal operation.
H1 10 The ASM executed a hardware reset. The cause here may be a drop in voltage on the device rack
or a plug-in contact fault, for instance. The user must start a
RESET command to reparameterize the SLG.
H1 11 The acknowledgement that has been read in has absolutely no reference to ongoing operation. It is
purely a software or synchronization error which cannot occur during normal operation.
H1 12 The command identifier of the command and the acknowledgment do not match. This is a soft-
ware or synchronization error which cannot occur during normal operation.
H1 13 The first command block was not appropriately acknowledged, i.e. the message frame control
parameters do not match. It is purely a software or synchronization error which cannot occur du-
ring normal operation.
H1 14 An error was detected while the interface control register was being read. This means that there is
no longer any synchronization between the writing of the command blocks and the reading of the
corresponding acknowledgments. Usually there is a plug-in contact fault. A RESET command
must be started to re-establish synchronization.
H1 15 The user-data starting address pointer calculated from the parameters DATDB and DATDW
(DBW 2 and 4 in BEDB) is outside the specified data block (pointer too long). Either DATDW
must be shortened or the specified data block (DATDB) must be extended. Then a RESET com-
mand must be started.
H1 16 The message frame control parameters of the command and acknowledgment blocks do not cor-
respond. It is purely a software or synchronization error which cannot occur during normal opera-
tion.
H1 17 See error H1 16
Error Messa
g
es
B-18 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-7 Evaluation of ANZ0 and ANZ1 error displays
Error code
(W#16#...)
Description
H1 18 While the command was being executed (ready bit not yet set), the data start address pointer (cal-
culated from DATDB and DATDW) was changed. This means that the absolute addresses are no
longer correct. A RESET command must be started so that the absolute addresses can be calcula-
ted again.
H1 19 The absolute address accessed during a read or write command (from/to the data block) is outside
the data block. This means that either the data block must be lengthened or the user-data start ad-
dress pointer (DATDB and DATDW) must be corrected (to create more space in the data block).
Then a RESET command must be started.
H1 20 During current operation (cyclic call of FC 46), the PLC’s memory was compressed or the abso-
lute location of the blocks (BEDB and/or DATDB) was changed. This means that the absolute
addresses are no longer correct. A RESET command must be started.
H1 21 This tells the user that only a RESET command is permissible as the next command. All other
commands will be rejected.
H0 27 QUEUE-READ: QUDW pointer is outside the DB specified in QUDB
H0 28 QUEUE-READ: The QUDB in the programmable controller is missing or is too small to read the
user data
H1 30 FC 46 has detected a system error. The acknowledgment from the filehandler or PROFIBUS DP
master is impermissible.
Overloading of the DP master
No current firmware version
The precise error code is indicated in ANZ2 (DBW 10). The error codes are specified in the des-
cription of SFC 58/59 in the S7 manual.
Kx xx QUEUE-WRITE parameterized incorrectly (DATDB / DATDW or DLNG)
Option 0000 hex:
The file entry with the number xxx or xxx + 1 parameterized in DATDB has an error. The file
entries in DATDB are counted starting at 1.
Option 0001 hex:
The file entry with the number xxx or xxx + 1 parameterized in DATDB contains a file name that
already exists on the MDS. The file entries in DATDB are counted starting at 1.
Note: The file entries are counted in decimal format.
Error Messa
g
es
B-19
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-8 Evaluation of the ANZ2 LED
Error code
(W#16#...)
Description
800A ASM is not ready (temporary message).
→This message is sent to a user who is not using FC 46 and queries the ASM acyclically in very
rapid succession.
8x7F Internal error in parameter x. Cannot be corrected by the user.
8x22
8x23
Area length error while reading a parameter
Area length error while writing a parameter
This error code indicates that the parameter x is completely or partially outside the operand range
or the length of a bit field for an ANY parameter is not divisible by 8.
8x24
8x25
Area error while reading a parameter
Area error while writing a parameter
This error code indicates that parameter x is located in an area which is impermissible for the sy-
stem function.
8x26 The parameter contains number of a time cell which is too large.
8x27 The parameter contains number of a counter cell which is too large.
8x28
8x29
Direction error while reading a parameter
Direction error while writing a parameter
The reference to parameter x is an operand whose bit address is not 0.
8x30
8x31
The parameter is located in the write-protected global DB.
The parameter is located in the write-protected instance DB.
8x32
8x34
8x35
The parameter has a DB number that is too large.
The parameter has an FC number that is too large.
The parameter has an FB number that is too large.
8x3A
8x3C
8x3E
The parameter has the number of a DB which is not loaded.
The parameter has the number of an FC which is not loaded.
The parameter has the number of an FB which is not loaded.
8x42
8x43
An access error occurred while the system was trying to read a parameter from the I/O area of the
inputs.
An access error occurred while the system was trying to write a parameter to the I/O area of the
outputs.
8x44
8x45
Error during nth (n > 1) read access after an error occurred
Error during nth (n > 1) write access after an error occurred
8090 Specified logical base address invalid: there is no assignment in the SDB1/SDB2x, or it is not a
base address.
8092 A type other than BYTE was specified in an ANY reference.
8093 The area identifier obtained when the logical address was configured (SDB1, SDB2x) is not per-
mitted for these SFCs. Permissible are:
0 = S7-400
1 = S7-300
2, 7 = DP modules
Evaluation of the
ANZ2 LED
Error Messa
g
es
B-20 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-8 Evaluation of the ANZ2 LED
Error code
(W#16#...)
Description
80A0 Negative acknowledgement while reading the module; FC picks up acknowledgment although no
acknowledgment is ready to be picked up
A user not working with FC 46 would like to pick up DS 101 (or DS 102 to
DS 104) but there is no acknowledgment available.
→Execute init_run for a resynchronization between the ASM and application
80A1 Negative acknowledgement while writing to the module; FC sends command although the ASM
cannot receive a command
80A2 DP protocol error for layer 2, possible hardware defect.
80A3 DP protocol error with direct-data-link-mapper or user interface/user, possible hardware error.
80B0 SFC not possible for this type of module.
Module does not know the data record.
Data record number w 241 is not permissible
Data records 0 and 1 are not permissible with SFC 58 “WR_REC”.
80B1 The length specified in the RECORD parameter is wrong.
80B2 The configured slot is not occupied.
80B3 The actual module type is not the required module type in SDB 1
80C0 RDREC:
The module has the data record but no read data have arrived yet.
WRREC:
The ASM is not ready to receive new data
→Wait for the cyclic counter to count up
80C1 The data of the preceding write job on the module for the same data record have not yet been pro-
cessed by the module.
80C2 The module is processing the maximum possible number of jobs for one CPU.
80C3 Required resources (memory, etc.) are busy at the moment.
This error is not reported by FC 46. In the event of this error,
FC 46 waits until the resources are made available again by the system.
80C4 Communication error
Parity error
SW ready not set
Error in block length management
Checksum error on CPU side
Checksum error on module side
80C5 Distributed I/O not available.
Error Messa
g
es
B-21
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-9 Other causes of error
Error Cause
The program does not work after a warm or cold restart The organization blocks for warm and cold restarts
have not been set in accordance with the FC descrip-
tion
There is no PROFIBUS connection; the bus is not in
RUN mode
After the MOBY blocks are loaded, the PLC goes into
STOP mode
BEDB and/or data block (DATDB) are not in the PLC or
are too short
Check the FC parameterization, particularly the ADR
parameter
Check the PROFIBUS DP master parameterization
After a command is started or executed, the PLC goes
into STOP mode
DATDB does not exist, has been deleted, or is too
small
Reading/writing from/to the ASM is not possible
A restart was not carried out after loading of BEDB
and/or data block
A restart was not carried out after the FC parameters
were changed
Other causes
or error
Error Messa
g
es
B-22 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
B.3 Error messages and causes in MOBY U with
ASM and FC 56 (filehandler)
B.3.1 General Errors
OB 86 not programmed and a slave has failed.
OB122 not programmed and a slave has failed.
The error only occurs when FC 56 is called.
The pointers Params_DB, command_DB, and DAT_DB are not present or
indicate an unavailable address area.
B.3.2 Error classes
There will always be an error status in FC 56 if the “error” variable is set for
a channel. If this is the case, the exact cause of the error can be established in
the “error_code” variable.
The “error_code” variable is a double word and consists of 4 ASCII charac-
ters. The first character is an alphanumeric character and identifies the error
class.
Table B-10 Error classes of the FC 56
Error class Meaning
Axxx Protocol errors
Bxxx SLG errors
Cxxx MDS errors
Dxxx Job-related errors
Exxx Directory-related errors
Fxxx File-related errors
Hxxx Error messages of the FC 56.
One special class of FC 56 errors comprises the type H8xx mes-
sages. These errors are reported by the controller’s communica-
tion modules.
Kxxx Error in the parameterization of QUEUE-READ and
QUEUE-WRITE
Programmable
controller goes
into STOP mode
Error Messa
g
es
B-23
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
B.3.3 Filehandler error messages
Table B-11 Error messages via the “error_code” variable
Error code
(B#16#..)
Description
A0 03 Impermissible recipient ID
System error; cannot occur with FC 56
A0 06 The command that has been started is not permissible (not defined). Correct the command para-
meter in the UDT 50 call.
A0 11 The message frame control parameters (DBN or command) are not in the correct sequence. Two or
more message frames are written to the same ASM.
Check the parameterization of the ASM_address and ASM_channel parameters
in the MOBY DB-FH
Do not execute the start of the command by means of the variable control function
A0 16 The filehandler is currently processing another command. It is imperative that a RESET command
be executed.
A0 17 The data block of the SLG is too long and cannot be transferred via PROFIBUS.
The block length parameter is too big for the RESET command (FC error or user error)
Program execution error in the SLG
Restart the ASM and the command
A0 18 Communication error; MOBY driver is active while a new command is sent
Check the command sequences in the application
Restart the ASM
B0 01 Error in the connection to the SLG:
Cable between ASM and SLG is incorrectly wired or there is a cable break.
24 V power is not connected or switched off.
Circuit breaker on the ASM has tripped
Hardware defective
This error is not shown at the start of system commands (RESET, NEXT,
ASM/SLG-STATUS).
B0 02 MDS_IO_control 1:
A command was started but there is no MDS in the transmission window of the SLG.
The dialog battery is discharged on the MDS 507 (the LR_bat bit is not mandatorily set; check
the battery voltage)
MDS_IO_control 0:
The old/current MDS has left the transmission window and the next/new one has entered the
transmission window. A command has been started (not NEXT). This command applies to the
new MDS, but the old/current MDS has not yet been terminated with NEXT.
A new MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG and leaves it again without a com-
mand being executed with this MDS (MDS slips through).
B0 08 The antenna is not switched on, or SET-ANT = ON with the antenna already on
User error; note the command sequence
B0 09 Buffer overflow in the MOBY driver of the ASM/SLG; system-internal error
Run init_run of the ASM
Error Messa
g
es
B-24 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-11 Error messages via the “error_code” variable
Error code
(B#16#..)
Description
B0 10 Driver error; communication between the filehandler and MDS driver is faulty (QB byte)
Run init_run of the ASM
B0 11 Communication error between the filehandler and MDS driver; the MDS driver reports a canceled
RESET although the filehandler is not processing a RESET
Run init_run of the ASM
B0 12 Unmotivated power-up message of the MDS driver in the ASM
Run init_run of the ASM
C0 02 The MDS reports a memory error.
The MDS has never been written or its battery failed and it lost its memory (not in the case of the
MDS EEPROM).
Change the MDS or battery (if battery_low is set)
Test the MDS by attempting to initialize it with the STG
Format MDS with FORMAT.
C0 06 During certain important processes (e.g. writing the system area of MDS, formatting the MDS),
the MDS must not leave the SLG’s transmission window, since otherwise the command would be
terminated with this error.
Start command again.
The MDS is positioned on the boundary of the SLG’s transmission window.
C0 07 The FORMAT or TRACE commands were sent with the wrong parameters. The physically
addressed address does not exist on the MDS (MDS memory is smaller than specified by the
command).
During READ/WRITE/UPDATE: pointer in FAT is defective; a block is pointed to which
does not exist on the MDS.
C0 08 Field interference on the SLG. The SLG is receiving interference from its surroundings, e. g.,
External interference field
The distance between two SLGs is too short and does not comply with the configuration
guidelines.
The connection cable to the SLG is defective, too long or does not meet specifications.
pr on the MDS 507 the dialog battery is discharged
Check LR_bat bit
Check the battery voltage
C0 09 Too many transmission errors have occurred. The MDS was not able to receive the command or
the write data from the ASM correctly even after several attempts.
The MDS is positioned directly in the boundary area of the transmission window.
Data transmission to the MDS is being affected by external interference.
C0 10 CRC sending error. The monitor receiving circuit detected an error while sending. Cause of
the error same as for C0 08.
The MDS is reporting CRC errors very often. (MDS is located on the boundary or MDS/SLG
defective.)
C0 11 Same as C0 08.
C0 12 The MDS is unable to execute the FORMAT command. The MDS is defective.
Error Messa
g
es
B-25
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-11 Error messages via the “error_code” variable
Error code
(B#16#..)
Description
C0 13 When being formatted, the MDS must be located in the transmission window of the SLG. Other-
wise, a timeout error occurs. This means:
The MDS is positioned directly in the boundary area of the transmission window.
The MDS is using too much current (defective).
The MDS EEPROM type is incorrectly parameterized in FORMAT
or on the MDS 507 the dialog battery is discharged
Check LR_bat bit
Check the battery voltage
C0 14 The memory of the MDS cannot be written.
The MDS has a smaller memory than that specified in the FORMAT command. The MDS
type must therefore be correctly parameterized.
The memory of the MDS is defective.
The MDS EEPROM has been written too often and has reached the end of its life.
C0 15 Address error. The address area of the MDS has been exceeded.
MDS is the wrong type.
C0 16 An ECC error has occurred. The data cannot be read from the MDS.
MDS data have been lost (MDS defective).
The MDS was not formatted with the ECC driver. Format the MDS again.
The MDS EEPROM has reached the end of its life. The data have been lost. Replace MDS.
The MDS moved out of the field while being written. The MDS is positioned incorrectly.
(Note: the system area of the MDS is automatically written to each SLG station.)
C0 17 The filehandler is not working correctly.
Check the command structure or command sequence.
The hardware of the ASM (firmware) has a defect
C0 18 Operating system error (AMOS mailbox)
Run init_run of the ASM
C0 19 The number of MDSs in the field is greater than the parameterized number of MDSs for “multi-
tag”.
Remove the excess number of MDSs in the field
The configuration of distance_limiting is set incorrectly
Check the environment of the SLG to see if there is by chance a MDS in the field
Generally only one MDS can be processed in the case of MOBY I
C0 20 Communication error between the filehandler and MDS driver; the MOBY driver does not know
the command from the filehandler.
Run init_run of the ASM
C0 21 Operating system error; watchdog error in the ASM/SLG
Run init_run of the ASM
D0 01 The filehandler will only accept a RESET command.
Filehandler was not yet initialized with an init_run
This state can only be resolved with an init_run
Error Messa
g
es
B-26 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-11 Error messages via the “error_code” variable
Error code
(B#16#..)
Description
D0 05 The FORMAT, CREATE, WRITE, ATTRIB, UPDATE, COVER, QUEUE-READ or QUEUE-
WRITE command has been issued with impermissible parameters.
FORMAT with impermissible MDS name or MDS type
CREATE with impermissible filename
WRITE/UPDATE with length of 0 (DLNG=0)
impermissible attribute
QUEUE-WRITE or QUEUE-READ with impermissible option or number of files
COVER with impermissible user (Only 0 or 1 are legal.)
D0 07 The system data transferred with the LOAD command are wrong.
– DLNG is parameterized incorrectly for LOAD.
– Wrong data block specified or incorrectly parameterized
– MOVE command not executed correctly; on the MDS, DIR + FAT do not match the
checksum
The MOVE command cannot be executed. The checksum does not match DIR + FAT. The
data memory has evidently exited the transmission window while system operation (writ-
ing DIR + FAT, for example) were being executed.
MOBY U: the LOAD and MOVE commands are not supported
D0 09 An init_run has been started by FC 56 with impermissible parameters. The cause of the error is in
the user program.
Check the INPUT parameters of the UDT 10 call (address 8 to 17 in UDT 10)
D0 14 WRITE command:
There is no longer sufficient storage space on the MDS. The data are not written to the MDS in
their entirety.
CREATE command:
When a file is created, a data block can no longer be reserved for this file. No more memory
blocks are free.
D0 15 The MDS could not be identified by the filehandler. Format the MDS again.
D0 18 The logically addressed address is not in the file. The FAT has an error. The MDS must be refor-
matted.
D0 22 The data memory has been locked by means of the COVER command. A write-access command
(e. g., UPDATE, CREATE) would destroy the data memory layout and is thus rejected.
D0 23 COVER command:
The MDS name specified in the command does not agree with the actual MDS name.
D0 24 The wrong UID is entered in the command or the MDS with the UID entered in the command is
not (or no longer) in the field
Application error; check UID in command
E0 01 The type of the MDS before the SLG does not correspond to the ECC mode that is set. The
MDS must be reformatted for the desired ECC mode.
The MDS is not a filehandler MDS; format MDS
E0 02 There are no more directory entries free. The file specified in the CREATE command can no lon-
ger be created.
E0 03 The file specified in the CREATE command already exists in the directory (no duplicated names
permitted).
Error Messa
g
es
B-27
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-11 Error messages via the “error_code” variable
Error code
(B#16#..)
Description
E0 05 A secondary FAT error was discovered in the READ or WRITE command. The file applica-
tion table (FAT) is defective. The MDS must be reformatted.
Wrong address specified in TRACE command
F0 01 The file addressed by a command (e.g. WRITE) does not exist in the directory. The file must
be created by means of CREATE.
Check file name (possibly not in ASCII format).
On or more files are to be read with QUEUE-READ but they do not exist on the MDS. Valid
data are not transferred to the user.
F0 05 Write access (WRITE, UPDATE, or DELETE) to a file which must not be changed (and is protec-
ted with an appropriate attribute).
F0 07 QUEUE-READ: specified file length shorter than file length
F0 08 QUEUE-READ: the skip calculated by the filehandler is larger than 0FFF hex (4095 dec)
H1 01 The FC 56 call parameters Params_DB/Params_ADDR are incorrect or the
Params_DB parameter is not present in the PLC.
H1 02 The length of the parameterized Params_DB/Params_ADDR is shorter than 300 bytes.
The pointer Params_DB/Params_ADDR in the call of FC 56 is incorrect
The Params_DB was not declared with the UDT 10
An init_run must be executed after the declaration of a new Params_DB.
H0 04 This command identifier (command in UDT 50) and thus also this command is not known to
FC 56. Check the command identifier.
H0 05 The access authorization of the corresponding SLG does not allow this command. For instance, if
the ”R” (read-only) access authorization has been granted to the SLG, a WRITE command cannot
be issued on this SLG. Check the INPUT parameters priority_RW and priority_RWD.
H1 07 The data block specified in Command_DB_number (UDT 10) does not exist.
Load the DB specified with DAT_DB_number into the project
Correct the pointer DAT_DB_number/DAT_DB_address
An init_run must be executed after the error is eliminated.
H1 10 The ASM executed a hardware reset. The cause here may be a drop in voltage on the device rack
or a plug-in contact fault, for instance. The user must start an init_run to reparameterize the SLG.
H1 11 It is purely a software or synchronization error which cannot occur during normal operation.
The acknowledgement that has been read in has absolutely no reference to the ongoing com-
mand.
The command identifier of the command and the acknowledgment do not match.
H1 16 It is purely a software or synchronization error which cannot occur during normal operation.
The message frame control parameters of the command and acknowledgment blocks do not
correspond.
H1 17 See error H1 16
Error Messa
g
es
B-28 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-11 Error messages via the “error_code” variable
Error code
(B#16#..)
Description
H1 19 The absolute address accessed during a read or write command (from/to the data block) is outside
the data block.
Extend the data block
The data block for the user data is not loaded in the PLC
Correct the user data start address pointer (DAT_DB_number/DAT_DB_address) accordingly
(e.g. enlarge data block)
Then start an init_run.
H1 21 This tells the user that only init_run is permissible as the next command. All other commands will
be rejected.
H0 28 QUEUE-READ: The QUEUE_DB in the programmable controller is missing or is too small to
read the user data.
Check the QUEUE_DB_number/QUEUE_DB_address parameters
H1 31 The parameterized channel number (ASM_channel in UDT 10) is outside the permissible range of
1 to 8.
H1 32 init_run cannot be executed; cyclic process image for ASM is faulty; FC 56 reports
timeout of the process image to the ASM
If necessary the timeout time can be adapted in DBB 58 of the UDT 10. The default value is
50 (dec) = 2 seconds. Higher values (max. 255) extend the timeout time.
ASM_address in UDT 10 is parameterized incorrectly. ASM_address may be on the wrong
module.
ASM_channel is parameterized with w16 or v0
ASM hardware/firmware is defective.
The same physical ASM channel is used in two (or more) UDT 10 structures. Check the
ASM_address and ASM_channel in all UDT 10 structures.
H1 33 An init_run was not correctly terminated. The process image is not consistent.
Execute init_run again
Switch ASM off and on again
The RUN-STOP switch was operated rapidly several times on the CPU (particularly in the
case of slow PROFIBUS transmission rates)
The same physical ASM channel is used in two (or more) UDT 10 structures. Check the
ASM_address and ASM_channel in all UDT 10 structures.
H1 34 The user started another init_run without waiting for ready while the first init_run command was
still being processed.
Do not set init_run cyclically
The same physical ASM channel is used in two (or more) UDT 10 structures. Check the
ASM_address and ASM_channel in all UDT 10 structures.
H1 35 The ASM has failed.
Power failure on MOBY ASM
PROFIBUS connector pulled or PROFIBUS cable broken
ASM_address or ASM_channel not present
The error is indicated when the ASM_Failure bit was set in OB 122. OB 122 is called when the
FC 56 can no longer access the cyclic word for the MOBY ASM.
Error Messa
g
es
B-29
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-11 Error messages via the “error_code” variable
Error code
(B#16#..)
Description
H1 36 The pointer to the command (Command_DB_number/Command_DB_address) does not
exist on the SIMATIC
The definition of Command_DB on the SIMATIC is too small. Use the UDT 50 for the defi-
nition.
H1 37 The parameterized value of MOBY_mode (UDT 10) is outside the permissible range of 0 to F.
H1 38 The parameterized value of MDS_IO_control is outside the permissible range of 0 to 7.
H8 0A ASM is not ready (temporary message).
This message is sent to a user who is not using FC 56 and queries the ASM acyclically in very
rapid succession.
H8 22
H8 23
Area length error while reading a parameter
Area length error while writing a parameter
This error code indicates that the parameter x is completely or partially outside the operand range
or the length of a bit field for an ANY parameter is not divisible by 8.
H8 24
H8 25
Area error while reading a parameter
Area error while writing a parameter
This error code indicates that the parameter x is located in an area that is impermissible for the
system function.
H8 26 The parameter contains number of a time cell which is too large.
H8 27 The parameter contains number of a counter cell which is too large.
H8 28
H8 29
Direction error while reading a parameter
Direction error while writing a parameter
The reference to parameter x is an operand whose bit address is not 0.
H8 30
H8 31
The parameter is located in the write-protected global DB.
The parameter is located in the write-protected instance DB.
H8 32
H8 34
H8 35
The parameter has a DB number that is too large.
The parameter has an FC number that is too large.
The parameter has an FB number that is too large.
H8 3A
H8 3C
H8 3E
The parameter has the number of a DB which is not loaded.
The parameter has the number of an FC which is not loaded.
The parameter has the number of an FB which is not loaded.
H8 42
H8 43
An access error occurred while the system was trying to read a parameter from the I/O area of the
inputs.
An access error occurred while the system was trying to write a parameter to the I/O area of the
outputs.
H8 44
H8 45
Error during nth (n > 1) read access after an error occurred
Error during nth (n > 1) write access after an error occurred
H8 7F Internal error in parameter x. Cannot be corrected by the user.
H8 90 Specified logical base address invalid: there is no assignment in the SDB1/SDB2x, or it is not a
base address.
H8 92 A type other than BYTE was specified in an ANY reference.
Error Messa
g
es
B-30 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-11 Error messages via the “error_code” variable
Error code
(B#16#..)
Description
H8 93 The area identifier obtained when the logical address was configured (SDB 1, SDB 2x) is not
permitted for these SFCs. Permissible are:
0 = S7-400
1 = S7-300
2, 7 = DP modules
H8 A0 Negative acknowledgement while reading the module; FC picks up acknowledgment although no
acknowledgment is ready to be picked up user not working with FC 56 would like to pick up DS
101 (or DS 102 to DS 104) but there is no acknowledgment available.
Execute init_run for a resynchronization between the ASM and application
H8 A1 Negative acknowledgement while writing to the module; FC sends command although the ASM
cannot receive a command
H8 A2 DP protocol error for layer 2, possible hardware defect.
H8 A3 DP protocol error with direct-data-link-mapper or user interface/user, possible hardware error.
H8 B0 SFC not possible for this type of module.
Module does not know the data record.
Data record number w 241 is not permissible
Data records 0 and 1 are not permitted with SFC5H8 “WR_REC”.
H8 B1 The length specified in the RECORD parameter is wrong.
H8 B2 The configured slot is not occupied.
H8 B3 The actual module type is not the required module type in SDB 1
H8 C0 RDREC:
The module has the data record but no read data have arrived yet.
WRREC:
The ASM is not ready to receive new data
→Wait for the cyclic counter to count up
H8 C1 The data of the preceding write job on the module for the same data record have not yet been pro-
cessed by the module.
H8 C2 The module is processing the maximum possible number of jobs for one CPU.
H8 C3 Required resources (memory, etc.) are busy at the moment.
This error is not reported by FC 56. In the event of this error,
FC 56 waits until the resources are made available again by the system.
H8 C4 Communication error
Parity error
SW ready not set
Error in block length management
Checksum error on CPU side
Checksum error on module side
Error Messa
g
es
B-31
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Table B-11 Error messages via the “error_code” variable
Error code
(B#16#..)
Description
H8 C5 Distributed I/O not available.
Kx xx QUEUE-WRITE incorrectly parameterized (DAT_DB_number/DAT_DB_address or length)
Option 0000 hex:
The file entry with the number xxx or xxx + 1 parameterized in DAT_DB_number is incorrect.
The file entries in DAT_DB_number are counted starting at 1.
Option 0001 hex:
The file entry with the number xxx or xxx + 1 parameterized in DAT_DB_number contains a file
name that already exists on the MDS.
The file entries in DAT_DB_number are counted starting at 1.
Note: The file entries are counted in decimal format.
Error Messa
g
es
B-32 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
B.3.4 Error indication with the ERR-LED
Various error conditions are not only indicated by an error_code on the FC 56
but also at the same time by the ERR-LED on the interface module.
The ERR-LED displays error messages with a flashing pattern as shown in
Table B-12, followed by an interval. This sequence is continuously repeated.
The ERR-LED is reset (switching off the flashing pattern) by
switching off the ASM (on all ASMs)
init_run command (on ASM 473 and ASM 475)
Table B-12 Errors indicated by the ERR-LED
ERR LED
flashes
Filehandler
error message
Meaning
1x
2x
3x
4x
5x
6x
7x
8x
9x
10x
11x
12x
13x
14x
15x
20x
D0 01
C0 06
B0 01
C0 02
C0 07
C0 08
C0 09
C0 10
C0 11
C0 12
C0 13
C0 14
C0 15
C0 16
C0 17
– – – –
Only RESET command permissible (ASM power-up)
Presence error
Fault in connection to SLG
Fault in RAM of MDS
Parameterization error with TRACE or FORMAT / command cannot be
interpreted
Too many sync attempts
Too many send errors
CRC send error
FORMAT, CRC error on receipt
FORMAT, MDS cannot be initialized
FORMAT, timeout
FORMAT, not initialized
CMD address error
ECC error
General driver error
Internal ASM overflow
Error Messa
g
es
C-1
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
ASCII Table C
C-2 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
A
SCII Table
Index-1
MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Index
Numbers
3RX9 802-0AA00, 6-4
6ES7 194-1AA00-0XA0, 6-4
6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0, 6-4
6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0, 6-19
6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0, 6-19
6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0, 6-24
6GT2 002-0EB20, 6-4
6GT2 002-0GA10, 6-19
6GT2 002-0HA10, 6-12
6GT2 002-0JA00, 6-27, 6-29
6GT2 080-2AA10, 6-4, 6-12, 6-19, 6-27, 6-29,
7-3
6GT2 090-0A..., 3-69, 3-91, 3-92, 3-93, 6-7,
6-27
6GT2 090-0AN50, 3-78
6GT2 090-0AT12, 3-78
6GT2 090-0AT80, 3-78
6GT2 090-0BA00, 3-78, 6-27
6GT2 090-0BA10, 6-27
6GT2 090-0BC00, 6-4, 6-7
6GT2 090-0QA00, 4-27, 4-33
6GT2 090-0QA00-ZA31, 4-27, 4-33
6GT2 090-0QB00, 4-27, 4-34
6GT2 090-0UA00, 3-78, 6-27
6GT2 091-0E..., 6-19, 6-24, 6-27
6GT2 091-0EH20, 3-73, 3-74, 3-79, 6-27
6GT2 091-0EH50, 3-73, 3-74, 3-79
6GT2 091-0EN10, 3-73, 3-74, 3-79
6GT2 091-0EN20, 3-73, 3-74, 3-79
6GT2 091-0EN50, 3-73, 3-74
6GT2 091-1C..., 6-12
6GT2 091-1CH20, 3-72, 6-4, 6-7, 6-12, 6-19
6GT2 091-1CH50, 3-72
6GT2 091-1CN10, 3-72
6GT2 091-1CN20, 3-72
6GT2 091-1CN50, 3-72
6GT2 091-2C..., 3-72
6GT2 091-2CH20, 3-72
6GT2 091-2E..., 3-73, 6-19, 6-27
6GT2 091-2EH20, 3-73, 3-74, 3-79
6GT2 091-2EH50, 3-73, 3-74, 3-79
6GT2 091-2EN10, 3-73, 3-74, 3-79
6GT2 091-2EN50, 3-73, 3-74
6GT2 094-0AB00, 7-12
6GT2 097-3AC40-0DA1, A-1
6GT2 097-3AC40-0DA2, A-1
6GT2 097-3AC60-0DA1, 6-4
6GT2 097-3AM00-0DA1, 6-4, 6-12, 6-19, A-1
6GT2 097-3AM00-0DA2, 6-4, 6-12, 6-19, A-1
6GT2 303-1CA00, 7-12
6GT2 381-1AB00, 7-12
6GT2 390-1AB00, 3-78, 6-27
6GT2 491-1HH50, 3-75, 7-4
6GT2 494-0AA00, 3-70, 6-27, 6-29, 6-32, 6-33,
7-4
6GT2 500-3BD10, 4-7
6GT2 500-3BF10, 4-12
6GT2 500-5CE10, 4-17
6GT2 500-5CF10, 4-22
6GT2 500-5JK10, 4-27
6GT2 501-0BA00, 5-4
6GT2 501-0CA00, 5-4, 6-29
6GT2 501-1BA00, 5-4
6GT2 501-1CA00, 5-4
6GT2 503-0AA00, 7-12
6GT2 503-1AA00, 7-12
6GT2 503-1DA00, 7-12
6GT2 590-0BA00, 3-91, 3-92, 3-93
6GT2 590-0QA00, 4-27
6GT2 591-1AH50, 3-91
6GT2 594-0AB00, 7-12
6SE7 198-8FA01-8AA0, 6-13
Index-2 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
A
ASM 452
Dimensions, 6-8
Ordering data, 6-4, 6-27
Pin allocations, 6-9
PROFIBUS address and terminating resist-
ance, 6-10
PROFIBUS configuration, 6-6
SLG connection system, 6-7, 6-15
Technical data, 6-5
ASM 473
Configuration, 6-14, 6-29
Dimensions, 6-17
Hardware configuration, 6-15
Ordering data, 6-12
Pin allocations, 6-16
Setup and functions, 6-11
Technical data, 6-12, 6-27
ASM 475
Ordering data, 6-19
Setup and functions, 6-18
Technical data, 6-20
ASM 480
Dimensions, 6-30
Pin allocations, 6-31
Setup and functions, 6-26
B
Basic EMC rules, 3-66
C
Cable configuration, 3-69
Cables, Shielding, 3-64
Contents, i
E
EMC guidelines, Avoiding interference sources,
3-62
Equipotential bonding, 3-63
Extra power pack for SLG, 3-70
L
LEDs for MOBY, 6-16
LEDs for PROFIBUS DP, 6-16
M
MDS U313
Field data, 4-9
Ordering data, 4-7
Technical data, 4-8
MDS U315
Field data, 4-14
Ordering data, 4-12
Technical data, 4-13
MDS U524
Field data, 4-19
Ordering data, 4-17
Technical data, 4-18
MDS U525
Field data, 4-24
Ordering data, 4-22
Technical data, 4-23
MDS U589
Field data, 4-29
Holders, 4-32
Ordering data, 4-27
Technical data, 4-28
MOBY Software, Ordering data, 7-3
MOBY STG U hand-held terminal
Hardware, 7-11
Ordering data, 7-12
Setup and functions, 7-9
System prerequisites, 7-10
Technical data, 7-12
MOBY wide-range power pack
Connector allocation of 24 V output, 7-6
Dimensions, 7-6
Ordering data, 7-4
Technical data, 7-5
O
Ordering data, Descriptions, A-1
P
Plug connector allocations, 3-70
S
Shielding concept, 3-68
Index
Index-4 MOBY U Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4)J31069-D0139-U001-A4-7618
Index
TO:
Siemens AG
A&D SE ES 4
PO Box 2355
D-90713 Fuerth
FROM:
Your name: ______________________________
Your title: ______________________________
Your company: ______________________________
Street: _____________________________
City: ______________________________
Telephone:______________________________
Please tick your branch.
rAutomotive industry
rChemical industry
rElectrical industry
rFoodstuffs
rProcess control technology
rMechanical engineering
rPetrochemistry
rPharmaceutics industry
rPlastics processing
rPaper industry
rTextiles industry
rTransportation industry
rOther _____________
If you encountered concrete problems, please use this space to explain.
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
Remarks/Suggestions
Your remarks and suggestions help us to improve the quality of our documentation.
Please complete this questionnaire as soon as you have time, and return it to Siemens.
Title of your manual:____________________________
Order number of your manual:_______________________
Please enter your personal evaluation from 1 (good) to 5 (poor).
1. Do the contents of this manual meet your requirements ?
2. Is it easy to find the information you need ?
3. Is the information written in an easy-to-understand manner ?
4. Does the amount of technical detail meet your requirements ?
5. What is your opinion of the figures and tables ?
